2007 Patriot

2007 PATRIOT
2007
OW N E R ’ S
M A N UA L
81-326-0712 First Edition Printed in U.S.A.

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 10
INTRODUCTION 1
CONTENTS
m Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 m Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
▫ Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 m Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
m How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 m Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION Roll Over Warning

This manual has been prepared with the assistance of Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll over rate
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is ground clearance, higher center of gravity, and narrower
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and track than many passenger cars. It is capable of perform-
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to ing better in a wide variety of off-road applications.
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can be caused to
tions and recommendations in this manual will help go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. and the narrower track, if this vehicle is out of control it
may roll over when some other vehicles may not.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with Do not attempt sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers or other
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
aware of all safety warnings. control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in an accident, roll over of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
injury. Drive carefully.
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine Mopart parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
INTRODUCTION 5
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more

each year, and could reduce disabling injuries by 2 1
million annually. In a roll over crash an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Roll Over Warning Label Consult the following table for a description of the
Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. this owner’s manual:
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
6 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This manual contains WARNINGS against operating 1
procedures, which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures,
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
driver’s front corner of the instrument panel, visible
through the windshield. This number also appears on the
vehicle registration or title. Vehicle Identification Number
8 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could

seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
m A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 m Steering Wheel Lock — Manual Transmission
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering
▫ Locking Doors With The Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . .17
m Sentry Key — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System . .17
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
m Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ “Child-Protection” Door Lock System (Rear Doors) ▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .32
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
m Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
m Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .24
m Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Auto Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Using The Panic Alarm: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock” . . . . . . . .27
m Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . .27
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . .42
▫ Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Second Row Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating
m Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .30 Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 ▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 m Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .49 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The 2
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
m Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .69
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal

The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
Automatic Transaxle
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
the ACC position, push the key and cylinder inward,
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
rotate the key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.
place.
Ignition Key Positions

Vehicle Key
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
CAUTION!
lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily
in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key to the An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a remove key from the ignition and lock all doors 2
malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the when leaving the vehicle unattended.
ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service. Manual Transaxle—If Equipped
Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position, push the
WARNING! key and cylinder inward, rotate the key to the LOCK
position, and remove the key.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a Locking Doors With The Key
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri- You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the
ignition. A child could operate power windows, key forward. See Section 7 of this manual for door lock
other controls, or move the vehicle. lubrication.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder unlocked. During normal operation, the Theft Alarm/

Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition, Immobilizer Light will come on for three (3) seconds
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key. immediately after the ignition switch is turned on for a
bulb check. Afterwards, if the bulb remains on, this
NOTE: With the driver’s door open, and the key in the
indicates a problem with the electronics.
ignition, both the power door locks and Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) will not function. If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check, this
indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the
SENTRY KEY — IF EQUIPPED vehicle. Both of these conditions will result in the engine
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho- being shut off after two (2) seconds of running.
rized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine.
The system will shut the engine off after two (2) seconds Keep in mind that a key, which has not been pro-
of running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle. grammed is also considered an invalid key even if it is
This system utilizes ignition keys, which have an elec- cut to fit the ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.
tronic chip (transponder) embedded into them. Only If the Theft Alarm/Immobilizer Light comes on during
keys that have been programmed to the vehicle can be normal vehicle operation, (the vehicle has been running
used to start and operate the vehicle. for longer than 10 seconds), a fault has been detected in
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be the electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon
armed or activated. Operation of the system is automatic as possible.
regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or
NOTE: Replacement Keys

• The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
2
security protection.
be programmed to any other vehicle.
• Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
any other transponder equipped components on the
with a four-digit PIN number. This number is required
same keychain will not cause a key-related (transpon-
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
der) fault unless the additional part is physically held
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the
against the ignition key being used when starting the
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure
vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle
will not cause interference with this system.
electronics. A blank key is one, which has never been
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have programmed.
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
dealer.
Sentry Key Programming The new Sentry Key has been programmed.
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys. If you do
valid sentry keys by performing the following procedure:
not have a programmed sentry key, contact your dealer
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to for details.
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
General Information
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and subject to the following conditions:
remove the first key.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
• This device must accept any interference that may be
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds, a chime
received, including interference that may cause undes-
will sound and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash.
ired operation.
Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds a single chime will sound. The Theft Alarm Light
will stop flashing, turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — Manual To Release The Steering Wheel Lock:

Transmission Only Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.
Your manual transmission vehicle is equipped with a If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to
passive steering wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the right or left to disengage the lock. 2
the vehicle without the ignition key. If the steering wheel
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
is moved no more than 1/2 turn in either direction and
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
the key is not in the ignition switch, the steering wheel
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
will lock.
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
Wheel:
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the
PARK unless the key is in the ACC, or ON positions, and
steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock
the brake pedal is depressed.
engages.
DOOR LOCKS
WARNING!
Manual Door Locks
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from For personal security, and safety in the event of an
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the as when you park and leave the vehicle.
keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key

from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal inju-
ries and death.
Manual Door Lock Plunger

CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.

Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all 2
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Power Door Locks

A door lock switch is located on the driver door panel.
Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch Location

3. All doors are closed.

4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter.
The Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Pro-
grammable Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC) — if equipped section of this manual
for details.
Power Door Lock Switches
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Automatic
Automatic Door Locks—If Equipped
Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by performing the
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
following procedure:
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
1. The Auto Lock feature is enabled.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
2. The transmission is in gear.
back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position.
Auto Unlock
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Auto Unlock feature is enabled.
2
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Ignition Key Position 6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors.
4. Verify reprogramming by driving the vehicle.
The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled.

Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Programmable
Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped section of this manual.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Auto
Unlock Feature can be enabled or disabled by performing
the following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position.
Ignition Key Position
3. Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the
doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
NOTE: Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock

features in accordance with local laws.
“Child-Protection” Door Lock System (Rear
Doors) — If Equipped
2
Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate
to the lock or unlock position.
Inserting Ignition Key
Child Protection Door Lock Location

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,

move the lock plunger up (unlocked position), roll down
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
Three Button Transmitter

This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances a
maximum of 66 feet (20 meters) using a hand held radio
transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked under “Personal Settings” in the EVIC section of this
with metal objects. manual. On non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the
following steps:
To unlock the doors and liftgate:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors
2
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the
all the doors and liftgate. When the UNLOCK button is following procedure:
pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate, and the
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
parking lights will flash on twice. The time for this
key fob.
feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to 2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds,
“Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock” under but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the
“Personal Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle Information UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to indicate
Center (EVIC) section of this manual for details. that this feature has changed.
NOTE: The system can also be programmed to unlock 3. Release both buttons at the same time.
all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button. On
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the keyfob.
vehicles refer to “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st”
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while 2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after 4 seconds),
you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security press the PANIC button. Release both buttons.
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
The “Sound Horn On Lock” and “Flash Lamps With
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
Lock” feature can be reactivated by repeating this proce-
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
dure.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
Using The Panic Alarm:
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
To lock the doors and liftgate: hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
horn will chip once to acknowledge the lock signal. If on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
desired, the “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be
The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you
turned on or off. On electronic vehicle information center
turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or
(EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to “Personal Settings” in
if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” sec-
tion of this manual. On non EVIC – equipped vehicles
perform the following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
NOTE: When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob, while
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be you are in the vehicle, will activate the Security Alarm.
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will
the system. cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to 2
deactivate the Security Alarm.
To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock”
The “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” feature can be
NOTE: The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure.
turned on or off. On electronic vehicle information center
(EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to 9Personal Settings9 in Programming Additional Transmitters
the EVIC section of this manual. On non EVIC - equipped Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with
vehicles perform the following steps: two key fob transmitters programmed only for that
vehicle. A total of eight fobs can be programmed for your
1. Press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
vehicle. Additional fobs can be programmed to your
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after 4 sec- vehicle through the use of a currently programmed fob.
onds) press the LOCK button. Release both buttons.
NOTE: When entering program mode using that fob, all
3. Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside other programmed fobs will be erased and you will have
of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the key to reprogram them for your vehicle.
fob with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the key
removed.
Use the Following procedure to program additional key program mode. All fobs that are to be programmed must
fobs if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key: be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was
heard.
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
8. Using the fob to be programmed, press and release
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seatbelt will cancel
both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, simultaneously.
any chiming that may confuse you during this program-
ming procedure). 9. A single chime will be heard.
3. Place the key into the ignition. 10. Within four seconds of hearing the chime, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the fob.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position ( Do not start the
engine ). 11. A single chime will be heard.
5. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob. 12. Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six
additional fobs.
6. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds. 13. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
7. When a single chime is heard release both buttons. The 14. Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60
chime is an indication that you have successfully entered seconds from when the original chime was heard. After
60 seconds, all programmed fobs function normally.
NOTE: If you do not have a programmed transmitter, If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a
contact your dealer for details. normal distance, check for these two conditions.
General Information 1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with batteries is five years.
2
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
following conditions:
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. or CB radios.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be Battery Replacement
received including interference that may cause undesired The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
operation.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
1. If the key fob is equipped with a screw, remove the 2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
screw. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
flat blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart. battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during rubbing alcohol.
removal.
3. To assemble the transmitter case, snap the two halves
together.
NOTE: If the key fob is equipped with a screw, reinstall
and tighten the screw until snug.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The system monitors the doors, liftgate, and ignition
switch for unauthorized operation.
If something triggers the alarm, the system will signal for
about 18 minutes. For the first 3 minutes the horn will
sound and the headlights, park lights, tail lights and the
indicator light in the cluster will flash. Then the exterior
Separating Transmitter Halves lights will flash for another 15 minutes.
If the monitored system, which triggered the alarm is disarm. After 16 seconds the indicator light will flash
deactivated the alarm will continue to sound until 3 slowly. This shows that the system is fully armed.
minutes of alarm time is reached. If the monitored
To disarm the system:
system, which triggered the alarm is deactivated after the
Unlock a front door/liftgate using the Keyless Entry
2
alarm has been on for 3 minutes the alarm will shut off
Transmitter.
immediately.
Starting the vehicle with a valid Sentry key will disarm
To set the alarm:
the system. A valid key is one that is programmed to that
1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out particular vehicle. A valid key will disarm the system, an
of the vehicle. invalid key will trigger the alarm.
2. Lock the door using either the door key, power door Tamper Alert
lock switch, or the Keyless Entry Transmitter and close all If the horn sounds 3 times when you unlock a front door
doors. using either a key or the Keyless Entry Transmitter, the
alarm has been activated. Check the vehicle for tamper-
3. The indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash
ing.
rapidly for 16 seconds. This shows that the system is
arming. During this period, if a door is opened, the
ignition switch is turned ON, or the power door locks are
unlocked in any manner, the system will automatically
Security System Manual Override LIFTGATE

The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the
NOTE: The key that is used to start the vehicle is also
manual door lock plunger.
used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate.
To unlock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock and
turn to the right (manual lock models only). The liftgate
can also be unlocked using the remote keyless entry or by
activating the power door lock switches located on the
front doors. The central locking/unlocking feature (if
equipped) can also be activated from the liftgate key
cylinder.
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed
without using the key. To open the liftgate, squeeze the
liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid
motion.
Door Lock Plunger
NOTE: Although the liftgate has no inside release

mechanism, the liftgate trim panel includes an opening
with a snap-in cap that provides access to release the
latch in the event of an electrical system malfunction. 2
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-

ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
Opening The Liftgate • If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
NOTE: In the event of a power malfunction, or the make sure that all windows are closed, and the
remote transmitter is inoperative, insert the key into the climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
liftgate lock cylinder and turn to the right (manual lock DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
models only). Using the liftgate handle, pull the liftgate
open with one fluid motion.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. POWER WINDOWS
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
Power Window Switches
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
Power Window Switch Location

passenger doors for passenger window control. The

windows will operate only when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position and for 45 seconds after the
ignition is turned OFF or the driver’s door is opened. 2
This feature can be turned off by your authorized dealer.
Auto Down
The driver’s window switch has an Auto Down feature.
Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically. To cancel the
Auto Down movement, operate the switch in either the
up or down direction and release the switch.
Power Window Switches
The control on the left front door has up-down switches
that give you finger tip control of all four power win-
dows. There is a single opening and closing switch on the
Window Lockout Switch OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS

The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows Some of the most important safety features in your
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
window lock button. To enable the window controls, airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if
press the window control button again. equipped, side airbags for both the driver and front
passenger. If you will be carrying children too small for
adult-size seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature
also, can be used to hold infant and child restraint
systems.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Lock Out Switch

of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown

WARNING!
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should 2
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other be belted at all times.
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Lap/Shoulder Belts
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/
buckled up properly. Shoulder Belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
far away from home or on your own street. and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
WARNING! WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people belts are designed to go around the large bones of
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri- your body. These are the strongest parts of your
ously injured or killed. body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
belts. suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
using a seat belt properly. wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

WARNING!
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high
on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In a
sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing
the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in
a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn
under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as
strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder
so that your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit
your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

WARNING!
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be 2
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision. at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Positioning Lap Belt
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to upward or downward to position the belt away from
allow the belt to retract fully. your neck. Push anchorage button to release the anchor-
age, and move it up or down to the position that serves
WARNING! you best.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and

leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will

prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that 2
it is locked in position.
Second Row Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center lap/shoulder belt features a three
point seat belt with a mini latch and buckle, which allows
the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor when
the seat is folded. The mini buckle and shoulder belt can
then be stored out of the way in the right side trim panel Mini Latch Stowage
for added convenience.
2. Grasp the mini latch plate and pull the belt over the
1. Remove the mini latch and regular latch from its seat.
stowed position in the right rear side trim panel.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head

restraint.
Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt

4. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the mini
Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt latch plate into the mini buckle until you hear a “click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
6. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the belt in a collision.
2
Connecting Mini Latch to Buckle

7. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up 8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
9. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt
to retract fully. Insert the mini latch plate into the slot
provided in the trim panel.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a
collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
Detaching Mini Latch and Buckle belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
10. To disengage the mini latch from the mini buckle for worn snugly and positioned properly.
storage, insert the regular latch plate into the black The pretensioners are triggered by the Airbag Control
button on the top of the mini buckle. The belt will Module (refer to information on Airbags in this section).
automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, Like the front airbags, the pretensioners are single use
items. After a collision that is severe enough to deploy The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be en-
the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced. abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert) NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
2
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recom-
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat (BeltAlert).
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10
ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8
seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending
km/h).
with the seat belt buckled.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on equipped) is in its lowest position, your dealer can
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt. provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender
It may be necessary to retract the seat belt. should be used only if the existing belt is not long
enough. When it is not required, remove the extender,
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
and store it.
single chime will sound to signify that you have success-
fully completed the programming.
WARNING!
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti-
vated by repeating this procedure. Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning low and snug, and in the recommended seating
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat positions. Remove and store the extender when not
belt remains unbuckled. needed.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe. 2
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and Front Airbags and Knee Bolsters
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s airbag is mounted in the center of
the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag is
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove com-
partment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the
airbag covers.
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal

regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity.
This vehicle may also be equipped with side curtain
airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next
to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain
airbags, they are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
Side Curtain Airbag Location

NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat

WARNING!
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or proper performance of the curtain airbags.
attempt to manually open them. You may damage the airbags
Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the
2
and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer
functional. These protective covers for the airbag cushions instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved
are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating. protection for the driver and front passenger. Side Cur-
• If your vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags, do not tain Airbags also work with seat belts to improve occu-
stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the
location of the side curtain airbag. The area where the side
pant protection.
curtain airbag is located should remain free from any ob-
structions.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
• If your vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags, do not
have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof, severe frontal collisions.
including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof
racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) If your vehicle is so equipped, the Side Curtain Airbag on
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to
of the vehicle for any reason. severe side collisions. However, even in collisions where
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way. the airbags deploy, you need the seat belts to keep you in
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as the correct position for the airbags to protect you prop-
alarm lights, stereos, citizens band radios etc. erly.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize 5. If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag. passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
1. Children 12 years old and under should ride buckled
restraint (refer to information on Child Restraint in this
up in the rear seat.
section).
2. Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
6. You should read the instructions provided with your
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe injury
or death to infants in that position. 7. All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle 8. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
seat belt properly (refer to information on Child Restraint back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate.
in this section) should be secured in the rear seat in child
9. If your vehicle has side curtain airbags do not lean
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats.
against the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the
4. Older children who do not use child restraints or space between you and the door.
belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buck-
10. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
led up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the 9If
You Need Customer Assistance9 section in this manual.
Air Bag System Components

WARNING!
The airbag system consists of the following:
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work 2
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In • Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (if equipped)
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all. • Airbag Warning Light
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags. • Driver Airbag
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument • Front Passenger Airbag
panel during airbag deployment could cause seri- • Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above Side Win-
ous injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back, dows (if equipped)
comfortably extending your arms to reach the
steering wheel or instrument panel. • Steering Wheel and Column
• If the vehicle has side curtain airbags, they also • Instrument Panel
need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door
• Interconnecting Wiring
or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
• Seatbelt Reminder Light
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Front Acceleration Sensors • The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
seconds as a self-check when the ignition is
How The Airbag System Works first turned on. After the self-check, the
Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continu-
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are de-
ously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on
signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
again after initial start up.
from direction provided by the ORC. This ORC will
detect roll over.
WARNING!
• The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in Ignoring the AIRBAG Warning Light in your instru-
the START or ON positions. These include all of the ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
items listed above except the knee bolster, the instru- protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
ment panel, and the steering wheel and column. If the on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and will not away.
inflate.
• The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag/Inflator • The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbag are de-
Units are located in the center of the steering wheel signed to activate only in certain side collisions. When
and the passenger side of the instrument panel. When the ORC (with side impact option) detects a collision
the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags, it requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate, it signals 2
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of nontoxic the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity
gas is generated to inflate the front airbags. Different of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain
airbag inflation rates may be possible based on colli- airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the
sion severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover, and outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
the upper passenger side of the instrument panel covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30
separate and fold out of the way, as the bags inflate to milliseconds (about one quarter of the time that it
their full size. The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure
milliseconds. This is about half of the time that it takes you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if
to blink your eyes. The bags then quickly deflate while items are positioned in the area where the side curtain
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. The airbag inflates. This especially applies to children. The
driver’s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes side curtain airbag is only about 3-1/2 inches (9 cm)
in the sides of the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag thick when it is inflated.
gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere with
the driver and the front passenger, and position every-
your control of the vehicle.
one for the best interaction with the front airbag.
If A Deployment Occurs However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a

The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ORC few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
detects a moderate-to-severe collision, to help restrain the immediately.
driver and front passenger, and then to immediately
• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
deflate.
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
system. rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
If you do have a collision, which deploys the airbags, any
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
or all of the following may occur:
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra- tions for cleaning.
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
airbags have been deployed. If you are involved in
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
another collision, the airbags will not be in place to
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
protect you.
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
Maintaining Your Airbag System

WARNING!
Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another colli- WARNING!

sion. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized • Modifications to any part of the airbag system 2
dealer as soon as possible. could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured because the airbags are not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
Enhanced Accident Response System
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment,
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
with the vehicle stopped, and the vehicle communication
upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
network intact, and the power intact, the Enhanced Acci-
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body struc-
dent Response System performs the following functions:
ture, or frame.
• Cuts off fuel to the engine.
• You need proper knee impact protection in a
• Flashes hazard lights. collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
• Turns on the interior lamps which remain on as long as equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster.
the battery has power or until the ignition key is • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
removed. airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
• Unlocks the doors automatically
Airbag Warning Light Event Data Recorder (EDR)

You will want to have the airbags ready to
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
record up to 5 - seconds of specific vehicle data param-
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
eters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
moment of airbag deployment, or near-deployment, and
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
up to a quarter second of high-speed deceleration data
• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers during and/or after air bag deployment or near-
during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is deployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag
first turned on. deploys, or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavail-
able.
• The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval. NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
driving.
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com- custodial entity upon request. General data that does not
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for
used by DaimlerChrysler and others to learn more about incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those
the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in maintained by the US government and various states. 2
order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would
addition to crash investigations initiated by identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be
DaimlerChrysler, such investigations may be requested treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be dis-
by customers, insurance carriers, government officials, closed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except
and professional crash researchers, such as those associ- when:
ated with universities, and with hospital and insurance
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
organizations.
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
DaimlerChrysler (regardless of initiative), the company preserved
or its designated representative will first obtain permis-
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a
sion of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle
DaimlerChrysler product
(usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the
electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data 3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a
4. Otherwise required by law
warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded: • Cruise control status

• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status • Traction/stability control status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
• Tire pressure monitoring system status
the airbag system
Child Restraint
• Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
• 9Time9 of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition times — babies and children, too. Every state in the
cycles and vehicle mileage) United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
• Impact acceleration and angle
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-
• Seatbelt status led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
• Transmission gear selection
• Safety experts recommend that children ride

WARNING!
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant 2
required to hold even an infant on your lap could carriers and 9convertible9 child seats. Both types of
become so great that you could not hold the child, no child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
matter how strong you are. The child and others could shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage
be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle system.
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. • The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). 9Convertible9 child seats can be
Infants And Small Children used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
There are different sizes and types of restraints for vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
children from newborn size to the child almost large weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat by children who weigh more than 9 kg (20 lbs) but are
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your less than one year old.
child:
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger (Some booster seats are equipped with a front shield
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe and are held in the vehicle by the lap portion.)
injury or death to infants in this position.
NOTE: For additional information refer to
• Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who www.seatcheck.org.
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible WARNING!
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who • Improper installation can lead to failure of an
are older than one year. These child seats are also held infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH collision. The child could be badly injured or
child restraint anchorage system. killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-
ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small • A rearward facing child restraint should only be
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child re-
sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion while the straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
child’s back is against the seat back; they should use a ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or
Belt Positioning Booster Seat. The child and booster fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
restraint: If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on
the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the 2
belt tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
tight if necessary.
where you will use it, before you buy it.
If the seat belt has a switchable retractor, it will have a
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
distinctive label. To operate the switchable retractor,
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
please refer to Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) in this
weight and height limits.
section.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
not work when you need it.
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
cinching latch plates or seat belt retractors that can be from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
switched to an automatic locking mode, which are belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child into the buckle with the release button facing out.
• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and from the retractor. Allow the belt to return into the
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate portion about the child restraint. Follow the instructions
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle of the child restraint manufacture.
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
NOTE: To reset this feature you must let all of the belt
try a different seating position.
webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been
restraint manufacturer’s directions. returned back into the retractor.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
and cause serious personal injury. provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle seat belt. All three rear seating positions
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR)
have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodat-
To operate the switchable retractor, pull the belt from the
ing LATCH-compatible child seats having flexible,
retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass
webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child seats with
through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into
the buckle. Then pull on the belt until it is all removed
fixed lower attachments must be installed in the out-

board positions only. Regardless of the specific type of
lower attachment, NEVER install LATCH-compatible
child seats such that two seats share a common lower 2
anchorage. If you are installing LATCH-compatible child
restraints in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use
the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the
outboard position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat
belt at the center position. If your child restraints are not
LATCH-compatible, you can only install the child re-
straints using the vehicle’s seat belts. Please refer to,
Installing the Child Restraint System for typical installa-
tion instructions. Rear Seat LATCH
Child restraints systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the top tether anchorage have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
most older vehicles. child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
your child unattended in the vehicle.
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also Installing the Child Restraint System
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
of all of the available attachments provided with your manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
child restraint in any vehicle. but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
the tension in the strap.
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower

and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the
hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages.
The tether strap should be routed under the center of the 2
head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the
rear of the seat back. Then tighten all three straps as you
push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat.
Rear Seat Tether Anchors

Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
tions that come with the child restraint system.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com-
patible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or

WARNING!
slouching can move the belt out of position.
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to • If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
increased head motion and possible injury to the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether their back.
strap.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend a collision.
over the front of the seat when their back is against the Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat. or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
your new vehicle. considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
interpreted as an indication of difficulty. 2
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 SAFETY TIPS
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
Exhaust Gas
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in. WARNING!
Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided. Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
follow the safety tips below.
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or Vehicle
out of the area.
Seat Belts
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
WARNING!
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
If you are required to drive with the deck lid / liftgate a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. retractor condition, replace the belt.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode. Airbag Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the LED is not lit during starting, have it
checked. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster Lights
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
feel the air directed against the windshield. beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. 2
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside Fluid Leaks
The Vehicle Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
Tires
fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid, trans-
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
mission fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
should be located and corrected immediately.
lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper pressure.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
m Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 m Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . .78
▫ Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
▫ Outside Mirror—Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Outside Mirror—Passenger’s Side . . . . . . . . . . .79
▫ UConnect™ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
▫ Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . .80
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Electric Remote-Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . .80
▫ Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
▫ Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Sun Visor Sliding Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
m Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Front Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 ▫ Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

▫ Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If ▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Manual Lumbar— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Driver’s Seat Back Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 ▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 ▫ Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 ▫ Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 m Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped . . 123
▫ Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 115 ▫ Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
m To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 m Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . 123
m Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 ▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 ▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 ▫ Programming The Universal Transceiver . . . . . 131

▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 ▫ “Rolling Code” Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 ▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . . 135
m Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
3
m Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . . 127 ▫ Reprogramming A Single Button . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 m Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) – If Equipped . . . 136
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 m Electronic Brake Control System –
ABS/TCS/BAS/ERM/HDC/ESP . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System – ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . 139
m Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) – If Equipped . . . 140 ▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ ESP (Electronic Stability Program) . . . . . . . . . 141 m Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped . . . . . . . 149
m Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 ▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . . 151
▫ Opening Sunroof – Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 m Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Opening Sunroof – Express Mode . . . . . . . . . . 147 m Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Closing Sunroof – Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 ▫ Cargo Light/Removable Self- Recharging
Flashlight – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Closing Sunroof – Express Mode . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped . 154
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Removable Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Venting Sunroof – Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Fold Down Speakers – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
m Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 m Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 160
3
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical mirror adjustment.
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Adjusting Rear View Mirror

Outside Mirror—Driver’s Side
Adjust the flat (Driver’s Side) outside mirror to center on
the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the
view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side

convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with 3
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in this convex mirror.
Passenger Side Mirror Directions

Outside Mirror—Passenger’s Side
Adjust the convex ( Passenger’s Side) outside mirror to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap
of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped Electric Remote-Control Mirrors

The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
Folding the Outside Mirrors

The exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved,
manually, either forward or rearward to resist damage. Remote Control Mirrors Switch
The hinges have three detent positions; full forward, full
rearward, and normal.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side

convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your right
side mirror could cause you to collide with another 3
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
right side mirror.
Passenger Side Mirror Directions

To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left
or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand
in the direction you want the mirror to move. When
finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the
center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror.
Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped Sun Visor Sliding Feature

To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing The sun visors may be pulled out to provide extended
the mirror cover upward. coverage of the side glass.
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —

IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., 9Call” { “Mike” {”Work9 or 9Dial”
{ “248-555-12129). Your cellular phone’s audio is trans-
mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect™ system.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
Vanity Mirror phone equipped with the Bluetooth 9Hands-Free Profile,9
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the with the system at a time. The system is available in
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s micro-
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
phone for private conversation.
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32 access the system.
names and four numbers per name. Each language has a
3
separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Blue-
tooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UCon-
nect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used UConnect™ Switches
The UConnect™ system can be used with any Hands- Operations

Free Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g., structure. Voice commands are required after most
Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UCon- UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
nect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or specific command and then guided through the available
the phone manufacturer for details. options.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™ the voice on beep, which follows the 9Ready9 prompt
system can be adjusted either from the radio volume or another prompt.
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
(right switch), if so equipped.
used. For example, instead of saying 9Setup9 and then
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from 9Phone Pairing,9 the following compound command
the UConnect™ system such as 9CELL9 or caller ID on can be said: 9Setup Phone Pairing.9
certain radios.
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice com- Cancel Command
mand 9Phonebook New Entry,9 or you can break the At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say
combined form command into two voice commands: 9Cancel9 and you will be returned to the main menu.
9Phonebook9 and 9New Entry.9 Please remember, the However, in a few instances the system will take you
UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a back to the previous menu.
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
3
sitting eight feet away from you.
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
Voice Command Tree your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
Help Command phone equipped with the Bluetooth 9Hands-Free Profile,9
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
know your options at any prompt, say 9Help9 following for supported phones.
the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will play all
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
ence your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply following vehicle specific websites may also provide
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a that you have:
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.
NOTE: • For identification purposes, you will be prompted to

• www.chrysler.com/uconnect give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
given a unique phone name.
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
pairing instructions: priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
9Setup Phone Pairing9 and follow the audible prompts. UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
• When prompted, after the voice on beep, say 9Pair a
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
Phone9 and follow the audible prompts.
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
• You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number, system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
which you will later need to enter into your cellular. make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not cellular phone at any time (refer to 9Advanced Phone
need to remember this pin number after the initial Connectivity9).
pairing process.
Call/Dial by Saying a Number Call/Dial by Saying a Name

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. • Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Dial.9 “Dial” or Call.9
• System will prompt you to say the number you want • System will prompt you to say the name of the person
3
call. you want call.
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901.” The phone • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
number that you enter must be of valid length and the name of the person you want to call. For example,
combination. Based on the Country in which the you can say 9John Doe,9 where John Doe is a previ-
vehicle was purchased, the UConnect™ limits the user ously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phone-
from dialing invalid combination of numbers. For book. Refer to 9Add Names to Your UConnect™
example, in USA, 234-567-890 is nine digits long, Phonebook,9 to learn how to store a name in the
which is not a valid USA phone number - the closest phonebook.
valid phone number has ten digits.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone num- then dial the corresponding phone number, which
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the may appear in the display of certain radios.
display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
when vehicle is not in motion.
main menu.
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say names in the phonebook with each name having up to
9Phonebook New Entry.9 four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
only in that language.
long names helps the voice recognition and is recom-
mended. For example, say 9Robert Smith9 or 9Robert9 Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
instead of 9Bob.9
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., when vehicle is not in motion.
9Home,9 9Work,9 9Mobile,9 or 9Pager9). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired. • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Edit.9
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work, when vehicle is not in motion.
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
3
phonebook entry that you are editing.
9Phonebook Delete.9
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
return to the main menu.
entry that you wish to delete or you can say 9List
9Phonebook Edit9 can be used to add another phone Names9 to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
number to a name entry that already exists in the from which you choose. To select one of the entries
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a from the list, press the 9Voice Recognition9 button
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
work number later using the 9Phonebook Edit9 feature. entry and say 9Delete.9
• After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will • After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
ask you which designation you wish to delete, home, deleted.
work, mobile, or pager. Say the designation you wish
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
to delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted. • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook List Names.9
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be de-
leted. Note that only the phonebook in the current • The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
language is deleted. phonebook entries.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook • To call one of the names in the list, press the 9Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name, and then say 9Call.9 NOTE: the user can also
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say exercise 9Edit9 or 9Delete9 operations at this point.
9Phonebook Erase All.9
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
• The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you number designation you wish to call.
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call

The following features can be accessed through the Currently in Progress
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your If a call is currently in progress and you have another
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call 3
your cellular service provider for the features that you on hold and answer the incoming call.
have.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system compatible phones in
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
Currently in Progress when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the only either answer an incoming call or ignore it.
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
Progress
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say 9Dial9 or
call was rejected.
9Call9 followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer Conference Call
to 9Toggling Between Calls.9 To combine two calls, refer When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
to 9Conference Call.9 hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
joined into one conference call.
To put a call on hold, press the 8Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. Three-Way Calling
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recogni-
8Phone’ button until you hear a single beep. tion’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under 9Making a Second Call
Toggling Between Calls
while Current Call in Progress.9 After the second call has
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
been joined into one conference call.
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time. Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the 8Phone’
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell • After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
phone dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
and hold the ‘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep. until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
Redial
call to the mobile phone.
• After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
3
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
9Redial.9 which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
• The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not • An active call is automatically transferred to the
be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ sys- mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
tem.
UConnect™ System Features
Call Continuation
Language Selection
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
using,
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types: • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
the name of the language you wish to switch to number for your area.
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
language selection. follows:
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change op- 9Emergency9 and the UConnect™ system will instruct
eration, only the language specific 32-name phonebook is the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
usable. The paired phone name is not language specific ber. This feature is only supported in the USA.
and usable across all languages.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
For command translations and alternate commands in Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and
supported languages, refer to “Command Translations” Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
at the end of this section. be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
Emergency Assistance The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your chances
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is of successfully making a phone call as compared to that
reachable: for the cell phone directly.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon- Paging

nect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in To learn how to page, refer to 9Working with Automated
emergency situations when the cell phone has network Systems.9 Paging works properly except for pagers of
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system. certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance, Voice Mail Calling
3
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to 9Working
with Automated Systems.9
Working with Automated Systems
9Towing Assistance.9
This method is designed to be used in instances where
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800- keypad while navigating through an automated tele-
528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454 phone system.
for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voice-
city in Mexico).
mail system or an automated service, such as, paging
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” cover- service or automated customer service. Some services
age details in the Warranty information booklet and on require immediate response selection, in some instances,
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card. that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you system will not repeat a phone number before you dial
wish to enter followed by the word 9Send.9 For example, it).
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’
button and say 93 7 4 6 # Send.9 Saying a number, or • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
sequence of numbers, followed by 9Send9 is also to be 9Setup Confirmations.9 The UConnect™ system will
used to navigate through an automated customer service play the current confirmation prompt status and you
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager. will be given the choice to change it.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts Phone and Network Status Indicators
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
recognition command immediately. For example, if a your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide
prompt is playing 9Would you like to pair a phone, clear notification to inform you of your phone and network
a{,9 you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and status when you are attempting to make a phone call
say 9Pair a Phone9 to select that option without having to using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming net-
listen to the rest of the voice prompt. work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)

You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while able to hear the conversation coming from the other
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By order to mute the UConnect™ system:
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
3
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition. 9Mute.9
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
may feel that the call did not go through even though the 9Mute-off.9
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Information Service If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue-

When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone tooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
number 9#121,9 you can access voice activated automated phone and the UConnect™ system, then follow the
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc. instruction described in your cellular phone user’s
related information. manual.
Advanced Phone Connectivity List Paired Cellular Phone Names
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect™
“Setup Phone pairing”.
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongo-
ing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to • When prompted, say 9List Phones.9
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
• The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
Recognition’ button and say 9Transfer Call.9
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone phone being announced, press the 8Voice recognition’
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
electronic devices, but can only be actively 9connected9 two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “de-
with one electronic device at a time. lete” a paired phone.
Select another Cellular Phone Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones

This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
that you want to use it with. 9Setup Phone Pairing.9
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. • At the next prompt, say 9Delete9 and follow the
3
prompts.
9Setup Select Phone9 and follow the prompts. • You can also press the 8Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played and then choose
• You can also press the 8Voice Recognition’ button
the phone you wish to delete.
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select. Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UCon- Voice Training
nect™ system will return to using the highest priority For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
phone present in or near (approximately with in 30 nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect
feet) the vehicle. system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two procedures: From Voice Recognition (VR)
outside the UConnect mode (e.g. from radio mode),
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Press and hold the ‘Voice Recognition’ button for 5
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
seconds until the session begins, or
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
• Press the ‘Voice Recognition’ button and say 9Setup, away from you.
Voice Training9 command.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the during a voice recognition period.
UConnect System. For best results, the Voice Training
• Performance is maximized under:
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan • low-to-medium blower setting,
switched off.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
• low road noise,
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
• smooth road surface,
To restore the Voice recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above • fully closed windows,
procedure and follow the prompts.
• dry weather condition.
• In a convertible vehicle, the system performance may • You can say 9O9 (letter 9O9) for 909 (zero). 98009 must be
be compromised with roof top down. spoken 9eight-zero-zero.9
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking • Even though international dialing for most number
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
cents, the system may not always work for some. number combinations may not be supported.
3
• When navigating through an automated system, such Far End Audio Performance
as voice mail, or when sending a page at the end of
• Audio quality is maximized under:
speaking the digit string, make sure to say 9send.9
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended. • low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding • low road noise,
names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
• smooth road surface,
• UConnect™ phonebook nametag recognition rate is
• fully closed windows, and
optimized for the voice of the person who stored the
name in the phonebook. • dry weather condition.
• Operation from driver seat.
• In a convertible vehicle, the system performance may switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recom-
be compromised with roof top down. mended to remain in Bluetooth 9on9 mode.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness Power-Up
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
not the UConnect™ system. or ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least
five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
• Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
Bluetooth Communication Link
Occasionally, Cellular phones have been found to lose
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this hap-
pens, the connection can generally be re-established by
3
3
North American English Call

Primary Alternate(s) Cancel
Zero Confirmation Prompts
One Continue
Two Delete
Three Dial
Four Edit
Five Emergency
Six English
Seven Erase All
Eight Espanol
Nine Francais
Star (*) Help
Plus (+) Home
Pound (#) Language
Add Location List names
All List phones
Mobile Towing assistance

Mute Transfer call
Mute off Try again
New entry Voice training
No Work 3
Pager Yes
Pair a phone General Information
Phone pairing Pairing This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
Phonebook Phone book RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
Previous following conditions:
Record again • This device may not cause harmful interference.
Redial
• This device must accept any interference received,
Return to main menu Return. Main menu
including interference that may cause undesired op-
Select phone Select
eration.
Send
Set up Phone settings / Phone
set up
SEATS Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the

seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
Front Seat Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats, near the
WARNING!
floor. Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired
position. • Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Front Seat Adjustment

Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped Manual Lumbar— If Equipped

The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using The Lumbar adjustment is located on the outboard side
the ratcheting handle on the outboard side of the seat to of the driver’s seat. To increase or decrease support,
adjust the driving position. rotate the handle up or down.
Seat Height Adjustment Lumbar Adjustment

Driver’s Seat Back Recline Adjustable Head Restraints

To recline: Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
1. Lean forward before lifting the handle, then lean back
on the head restraints so that the upper edge is as high as
to the desired position and release the handle.
practical. To raise the head restraint, pull up on the head
2. Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright restraint. To lower the head restraint, depress the button
position. and push down on the head restraint.
Reclining Seat
Heated Seats — If Equipped
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin

because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, 3
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
Head Restraint Adjustment cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
This feature heats the front driver’s and passenger’s • Pressing the switch a second time will select low-level
seats. The controls for the heater is located on the heating. Pressing the switch a third time will shut the
instrument panel, below the radio. After turning on the heating elements off.
ignition, you may choose OFF, HIGH, or LOW heat
When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters
settings. An indicator on the switch shows which setting
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
has been chosen.
of operation after heating is activated. The heat output
then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If
high-level heating is selected, the system will automati-
cally switch to the low level after about 30 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the number of illu-
minated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the
change. Operation on the low setting also turns off
Heated Seat Switches automatically after about 30 minutes.
• Pressing the switch once will select high- NOTE: If the high heat setting is selected, heat will be
level heating. felt within 2 to 3 minutes.
Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat
Front Passenger Seat Folded Flat

Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat Control
Folding Rear Seat

To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull the strap forward to move the
seat forward and flat.
Rear Seat Folded Flat
Folding Rear Seat

Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped
Rear Seat Recline Pull
Reclining The Rear Seat

For additional comfort, pull the strap forward just TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
enough to release the seatback latch. Then push the To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
seatback to a reclined position, approximately 35 degrees the hood release lever located on the left kick panel.
maximum, and release the strap.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts
• Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat Primary Hood Latch
and using a seat belt properly.
Then move the safety catch located under the front edge To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
of the hood, near the center and raise the hood. close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 20
cm (8 inches) and then drop it. This should secure both
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
3
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when

the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
Secondary Hood Latch

Lift the hood prop rod, clipped to the right side (left side
facing hood) of the engine compartment, to secure the
hood in the open position. Place the hood prop at the
location stamped into the inner hood surface.
LIGHTS
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above
the rear view mirror. Each light is turned ON by pressing
the button. Press the button a second time to turn the
light OFF. The lights also come on when a door is opened
or the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the
second detent.
Map/Reading Lights
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle. They will not turn off
automatically.
Multi-Function Control Lever

The Multi-Function Control Lever controls the operation
of the headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight
beam selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior
lights, the passing lights, and fog lights. The lever is
located on the left side of the steering column. 3
Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights
Turn the end of the Multi-Function Control Lever to the
first detent for parking light operation. Turn to the
second detent for headlight operation.
Headlight Control
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights, Lights-on Reminder

rotate the center portion of the Multi-Function Control If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
Lever up or down. is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Dimmer Control
Fog Lights — If Equipped NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the head-
lights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will
turn off the fog lights.
Turn Signals
3
Front Fog Lights Control
The front fog light switch is on the Multi-Function

Control Lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull Turn Signal Control
out the end of the control lever. Move the Multi-Function Control Lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is
defective.
High Beam Control

Push the Multi-Function Control Lever away from you to
switch the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever
toward you, to switch the headlights back to Low beam.
Passing Light WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
lightly pulling the Multi-Function Control Lever toward on the control lever. The lever is located on the
you. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high right side of the steering column.
beam and remain on until the lever is released.
Windshield Washers
NOTE: If the Multi-Function Control Lever is held in To use the washer, pull the control lever toward you and
3
the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds, the hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
high beams will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds the delay range, the wiper will operate in low speed for
for the next flash to pass operation. two wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
Functionality
The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Running
Lights (DRL) at DRL intensity (lower), whenever the
ignition is on, the engine is running, the headlight switch
is off, the parking brake is off, the turn signal is off, and
the gear shift is in any position except park.
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers Mist Feature
will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn OFF. Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single
wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
wipers will continue to operate.
Rear Washer control
Mist Control
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and

allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to 3
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Windshield Wiper Operation

Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper
speed. Wiper Control
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-
tween cycles, desirable. Select the delay interval by
turning the end of the lever. Rotate the knob upward
(clockwise) to decrease the delay time and downward
(counterclockwise) to increase the delay time. The delay

can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18
seconds between cycles, to a cycle every second.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer (If Equipped) is shared. It is located
in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger
side and should be checked for fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer sol-
vent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for
a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
Tilting Steering Column Control
TILT STEERING COLUMN
To tilt the steering column, push down on the lever below
the turn signal control lever. With one hand firmly on the
wheel, move the steering column up or down as desired.
Push the lever back up to lock the column firmly in place.
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is

moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve- 3
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). The
Speed Control Location
speed control lever is located on the right side of the
steering wheel. To Activate:
Push the ON/OFF button. The CRUISE indicator in the
instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
OFF, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The
CRUISE indicator will turn off. The system should be
turned OFF when not in use.
To Deactivate:
WARNING!
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the speed control
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on lever towards you “CANCEL”, or normal brake or clutch
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. control without erasing the set speed memory. Pressing
You could lose control and have an accident. Always the ON/OFF button or turning off the ignition switch
leave the system OFF when you are not using it. erases the set speed memory.
To Resume Speed:
To resume a previously set speed, push the “RESUME
To Set At A Desired Speed: ACCEL” lever up and release. Resume can be used at any
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. To Vary The Speed Setting:
When the speed control is ON, speed can be increased by
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady pushing up and holding “RESUME ACCEL”. Release the
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever. lever when the desired speed is reached, and the new
speed will be set.
Tapping “RESUME ACCEL” once will result in a 1 mph

WARNING!
(1.6 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc. can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
To decrease speed while speed control is ON, push down go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
and hold “SET DECEL”. Release the lever when the control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use 3
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set. Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
Tapping the “SET DECEL” button once will result in a 1
mph (1.6 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is
tapped, speed decreases. To Accelerate For Passing:
Manual Transaxle: Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
control. A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed Using Speed Control On Hills
control disengages is normal.
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed is normal.
loss.
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so

it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

NOTE: The HomeLinkt system will be disabled if the
Vehicle Theft Alarm (if equipped) is in the Armed or
Alarming state. The HomeLinkt system will only operate
when the Vehicle Theft Alarm (if equipped) is in the
Disarmed mode.
The HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that oper-
ate devices such as garage door openers, motorized HomeLink Buttons
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the The three buttons for your garage door opener will be
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off located in the the headliner, several inches rearward of
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries the rearview mirror. The training procedure is the same
are needed. regardless of the 3-button location.
For additional information on HomeLinkt, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
Programming The Universal Transceiver

WARNING!
For best results, install a new battery in the hand held
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and transmitter before programming. If your garage door
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be opener (located in the garage) is equipped with an
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver antenna, make sure that the antenna is hanging straight
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and down. 3
reverse” feature as required by federal safety stan- 1. Turn off the engine.
dards. This includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door WARNING!
opener without these safety features it could cause
injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety infor- ous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
mation or assistance. training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
ous injury or death.
3. Choose one of the three Universal Transceiver buttons

WARNING!
to program. Place the hand held controller one to three
Your motorized door or gate will open and close inches from the Universal Transceiver while keeping its
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do indicator light in view.
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
damage to objects.
2. Erase the factory test codes by pressing the two

outside buttons. Release the buttons when the light in the
Universal Transceiver begins to flash (about 20 seconds).
NOTE: Step 2 does not have to be followed to program
additional hand held transmitters.
Proper Transceiver Training Distance
4. Using both hands, press the hand held transmitter transmitter, refer to the Rolling Code Paragraph, or call
button and the desired Universal Transceiver button. Do toll free for customer assistance at 1–800–355–3515, or
not release the buttons until step 5 has been completed. on the internet at www.homelink.com.
NOTE: Some entry gates and garage door openers may “Rolling Code” Programming
require you to replace step 4 with the procedures listed
under Canadian Programming.
NOTE: If your hand held transmitter appears to pro- 3
gram the Universal Transceiver, but your garage door or
5. The indicator light in the Universal Transceiver will other device does not operate, and your device was
begin to flash, first slowly and then rapidly. The rapid manufactured after 1996, your garage door opener or
flashing indicates successful programming. If after 90 other device may have a “Rolling Code” system.
seconds the indicator light does not flash rapidly or goes
On garage door openers with the “Rolling Code” feature,
out, return to step 1 and repeat the procedure. To train the
the transmitter code changes after each use to prevent the
other buttons, repeat steps 3 and 4. Be sure to keep your
copying of your code.
hand held transmitters in case you need to retrain the
Universal Transceiver. To check if your device is protected by a “Rolling Code”
system:
NOTE: If you do not successfully program the Uni-
versal Transceiver to learn the signal of your hand held • Check the owner’s manual for the device for mention
of “Rolling Codes”.
• Press and hold the programmed button on the Univer- 2. Press and hold the training button on the garage door
sal Transceiver. If the Universal Transceiver indicator opener head unit. This will activate the “training” light.
light flashes rapidly and then stays on after 2 seconds,
NOTE: After completing step 2, you have 30 seconds to
the device has the “Rolling Code” feature.
start step 3.
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code
3. Return to the Universal Transceiver in the vehicle and
equipped devices) with the rolling code feature, follow
firmly press and release the garage door button. Press
these instructions after completing the Programming
and release the button a second time to complete the
portion of this text:
training process. Some garage door openers may require
NOTE: The assistance of a second person may make the you to do this procedure a third time to complete the
following programming procedure quicker and easier. training.
1. Locate the training button on the garage door motor Your garage door opener should now recognize your
head unit. The exact location and color of the button may Universal Transceiver. The remaining two buttons may
vary by garage door opener manufacturer. If you have now be programmed if this has not previously been
difficulty in locating the training button, check your done. Refer to the Programming instructions. You may
garage door opener manual, or call 1-800-355-3515 or, on use either your Universal Transceiver or your original
the Internet, at www.homelink.com. hand-held transmitter to open you garage door.
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming Operation

Canadian frequency laws, and the technology of some Press and hold the desired button on the Universal
entry gates, require you to press and release the hand Transceiver until the garage door or other device begins
held transmitter button every two seconds during pro- to operate. The light in the display shows that the signal
gramming. is being transmitted. The hand held transmitter may also
Continue to press and hold the Universal Transceiver
be used at any time. 3
button while you press and release the hand held trans- Reprogramming A Single Button
mitter button until the frequency signal has been learned.
1. Press and hold the Universal Transceiver button to be
The Universal Transceiver light will flash slowly and
reprogrammed. Do not release until step 4 has been
then rapidly when the programming is successful.
completed.
NOTE: When programming such a garage door opener
2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after
or gate, unplug the device to prevent possible damage to
20 seconds) position the hand held transmitter one to
the garage door or gate motor.
three inches away from the button to be trained.
3. Press and hold the hand held transmitter button.
4. The Universal Transceiver indicator light will begin to
flash, first slowly, then rapidly. When the indicator lights
begin to flash rapidly, release both buttons.
Security HomeLinkt is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies. Inc.
To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) – IF
down both outside buttons until the indicator light EQUIPPED
begins to flash. This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
following conditions: help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. NOTE: ABS improves steering control of the vehicle
during hard braking maneuvers.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM –

WARNING!
ABS/TCS/BAS/ERM/HDC/ESP
• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad-
laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can vanced electronic brake control system that includes
it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle (TCS), Brake Assist System ( BAS), Electronic Roll Miti- 3
brakes and tires or the traction afforded. gation (ERM), Hill Descent Control (HDC) and Electronic
Stability Program (ESP). All systems work together to
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, conditions and are commonly referred to as ESP.
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver Anti-Lock Brake System – ABS
can prevent accidents. This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in this Section of the
or the safety of others.
manual for more information about ABS.
Traction Control System (TCS) Brake Assist System (BAS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. ing pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
either the “Partial Off” or “ESP Off” modes. Refer to desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
“Electronic Stability Program (ESP)” in this Section of this deactivated.
manual.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)

WARNING!
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
• BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the 3
traction afforded. appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only
• The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu-
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, vers.
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
can prevent accidents. during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It can not
prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
other vehicles.
on terrain. The system is activated by placing the vehicle

WARNING!
in “Off-Road” mode and placing the gear selector in
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi- “Low” or “Reverse.”
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance When the system is available, the HDC indica-
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM can not tor lamp will be illuminated solid.
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful HDC has the capability to sense terrain and will only
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an activate when the vehicle is descending a hill. It will not
ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a activate on level ground. If desired, HDC can be fully
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar- deactivated in by putting the vehicle into ESP “full off”
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others. mode (refer to the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
located in the “Electronic Brake Control” section of this
manual). This is done by pressing and holding the ESP
HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC) – IF EQUIPPED OFF button for 5 seconds.
This system maintains vehicle speed while descending
hills during off-road driving situations. HDC will auto- HDC operation can be overridden with brake application
matically apply the brakes to control downhill speed to to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed.
between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 6 mph (9 km/h) depending Conversely, if more speed is desired during HDC control,
the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed like to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
normal. When either the brake or the accelerator is does not match the intended path, ESP applies the brake
released, HDC will control the vehicle back to the origi- of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
nal set speed. oversteer or understeer condition
HDC is only intended for low speed off-road driving. At • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
vehicle speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h) HDC will no appropriate for the steering wheel position.
3
longer function. If the HDC indicator lamp begins to
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
flash it means that the brakes are getting too hot and the
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
vehicle should be stopped to allow the brakes to cool.
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” located in the instrument
This system enhances directional control and stability of cluster, starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP cor- the ESP system becomes active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator
rects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter- Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
acting the over/under steer condition. Engine power up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
desired path. ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine prevailing road conditions.
the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it
ESP 2WD Operating Modes

WARNING!
All 2WD vehicles can choose the following ESP operating
• Electronic Stability Program (ESP) cannot prevent modes:
the natural laws of physics from acting on the ESP ON
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by This is the normal operating mode for ESP. Whenever the
prevailing road conditions. vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode.
• ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those This mode should be used for almost all driving situa-
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on tions. ESP should only be turned to “Partial Off” or “ESP
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a Off” for specific reasons as noted below.
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent PARTIAL ESP
accidents. This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the
• The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must “ESP Control Switch”. When in “Partial Off” mode, the
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous TCS portion of ESP, except for the “limited slip” feature
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the
or the safety of others. “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other
stability features of ESP function normally, with the
exception of engine power reduction. This mode is
intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or
gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing
normally allow is required to gain traction. the “ESP Control Switch”. This may be done while the
vehicle is in motion.
To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the “ESP
Control Switch”. This will restore the normal “ESP On” ESP 4WD Operating Modes
mode of operation. In addition to ESP ON and Partial ESP (described above
in “ESP 2WD Operating Modes”), all 4WD equipped
3
WARNING! vehicles can also choose the following ESP operating
mode:
In the Partial ESP mode, the engine torque reduction
and stability features are desensitized. Therefore, the ESP OFF
enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
unavailable. when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu-
verability due to trail conditions. This mode is entered by
depressing and holding the “ESP Control Switch” for 5
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or running. After 5 seconds, the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light”
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off” will illuminate and the “ESP Off” message will appear in
mode by pressing the ESP switch. Once the situation the odometer. Press and release the trip odometer button
requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is located on the instrument cluster to clear this message.
In this mode, ESP and TCS, except for the “limited slip” ESP/BAS Warning Light and ESP/TCS Indicator
feature described in the TCS section, are turned off until Light
the vehicle reaches a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h). At 35 The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with
mph (56 km/h) the normal ESP stability function returns the BAS indicator. The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning
with the exception of engine power reduction. TCS Lamp” and the yellow “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the
remains off. When the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph instrument cluster both come on when the ignition
(48 km/h) the ESP system shuts off. ESP is off at low switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should both
vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off-road go out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warn-
driving but ESP function returns to provide the stability ing Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine
feature at speeds above 35 mph (56 km/h). The “ESP/ running, a malfunction has been detected in either the
TCS Indicator Light” will always be illuminated when ESP or BAS system, or both. If this light remains on after
ESP is off. several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
“ESP Control Switch”. This will restore the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
normal “ESP On” mode of operation.
NOTE:
WARNING!
• The “ESP Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS Warning
With the ESP switched off, the enhanced vehicle Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition
stability offered by ESP is unavailable. In an emer- switch is turned ON.
gency evasive maneuver, the ESP system will not • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
engage to assist in maintaining stability. “ESP Off” will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
3
mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use,
only. • The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!
The power sunroof switch is located in the reading lamp.
• Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
Power Sunroof Switch • Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
OPENING SUNROOF – MANUAL held forward again. To ensure sunroof is fully closed,
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward press and hold switch until sunroof has completely
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the stopped moving.
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open
CLOSING SUNROOF – EXPRESS MODE
condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward
By pressing the switch forward and releasing, the sunroof
again.
will fully close from any position and stop at the end of
3
OPENING SUNROOF – EXPRESS MODE travel automatically. This is called Express Close. During
By pressing the switch rearward and releasing, the sun- Express Close, any activation of the sunroof switch will
roof will fully open from any position and stop at the end stop the sunroof.
of travel automatically. This is called Express Open.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
During Express Open, any activation of the sunroof
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
switch will stop the sunroof.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
CLOSING SUNROOF – MANUAL struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the sunroof will automatically retract. Next, press the switch
forward position. Again, any release of the switch will forward and release to Express Close.
stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a
partial close condition until the switch is pushed and
PINCH PROTECT OVERRIDE SUNSHADE OPERATION

If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing, The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
towards the close position.
open.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
Wind Buffeting
pressed.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
VENTING SUNROOF – EXPRESS pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
Press and hold the “V” button, and the sunroof will open ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
to the vent position. This is called Express Vent, and will windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
occur regardless of the sunroof position. During Express open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
sunroof. the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
WARNING!
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel. To Avoid Serious Injury or Death:
IGNITION OFF OPERATION • Do not use a 3 - Prong Adaptor.
The sunroof will also operate up to 45 seconds after the • Do not insert any objects into the receptacles. 3
ignition has been turned off. The sunroof operation will
• Do not touch with wet hands.
be canceled if either of the front doors are opened during
the accessory delay time or set accessory delay time. • Close the lid when not in use, and while driving
the vehicle
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
• If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
There is a standard 12-Volt power outlet in the instru-
shock and failure.
ment panel and a 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) power
outlet in the center console on certain models for added
convenience. These outlets can power cell phones, elec-
tronics and other low power devices.
NOTE: Due to overload protection the inverter will shut
down if the power rating is exceeded.
Power Outlet 12 Volts Power Outlet 115 Volts (150 Watt)

Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off CONSOLE FEATURES
CAUTION! WARNING!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Do not operate this vehicle with the console compart-
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in ment lid in the open position. Cell phones, music 3
use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if players, and other hand held electronic devices
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life while driving can cause an accident due to distrac-
and/or prevent engine starting. tion, resulting in death or injury.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.); will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
The floor console’s sliding armrest moves forward 3 NOTE: The flip pocket and console lid features are
inches to accommodate shorter drivers. The armrest lid intended to be used in the upright or open position only
also includes a unique flip pocket for storing a phone or while the vehicle is parked. While driving, all handheld
an MP3 player. The bin inside the console can hold up to devices should be properly stowed, and the flip pocket
10 CD jewel cases or other items securely out of sight. and the console lid should be closed.
CARGO AREA FEATURES

Cargo Light/Removable Self- Recharging
Flashlight – If Equipped
The dual-function light is mounted in the headliner
above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area, and
part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight
when needed. The flashlight features two bright LED
light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium
batteries when snapped back into place for convenience.
Floor Console
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,

twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
Removing Flashlight
Press and Release

Three Press Switch Cargo Cover Extended

Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped 2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
To cover the cargo area: the pillar trim cover.
1. Grasp the center portion of the cover flap. Pull it over 3. The Liftgate may be opened or closed with the cargo
the cargo area. cover in place.
Cargo Cover Removal
WARNING!
In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could

cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and 3
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-
ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store in the vehicle.
1. Detach the cargo area cover and allow it to retract. Cargo Cover Removal
2. Grasp cargo area cover assembly and push against
spring tension to the left.
3. Remove right side from cargo area.
4. Remove assembly from the vehicle.
Removable Load Floor Cargo Tie-Down Loops

The cargo area load floor is removable and can be There are four D-rings tie-down loops in the lower trim
washed with mild soap and water. For removal, lift the for securing cargo. The tie-downs located on the cargo
load floor with your finger at the space provided at the area floor should be used to safely secure loads when
rear. vehicle is moving.
WARNING!
• Cargo tie-down Loops are not safe anchors for a

child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision
a loop could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
• The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve-
hicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
Removable Load Floor loading your vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put Fold Down Speakers – If Equipped
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible. When the liftgate is open, the speakers can swing down
from the trim panel to face rearward, for tailgating and
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
other activities.
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
3
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING!
To help protect against personal injury, passengers

should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and Fold Down Speakers
use seat belts.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Wiper/Washer
A switch on the right side of the steering column controls
operation of the rear wiper/washer function. Rotating
the center of the switch forward to the ON position will
activate the wiper. The rear wiper operates in an inter-
mittent mode only. Rotating the center of the switch all
the way forward will turn on the wash function. The
wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button
is pressed. Upon release, the wipers will cycle two times
before returning to the set position.
Rear Washer Wiper Control
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “Park”
position if power accessory delay is active. Power acces-
sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door, if this
happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position
and will not go to park.
Adding Washer Fluid Rear Window Defroster

The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer (If Equipped) is shared. It is located
in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger
side and should be checked for fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer sol- 3
vent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for
a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
Rear Wiper Heater Grid

install Mopart cross rails built specifically for this roof

CAUTION!
rack system or a number of after market rails that are
Use care when washing the inside of the rear window tailored to your lifestyle or activities.
to prevent damage to heating elements. Use a soft NOTE: The optional cross rails have seven specific
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to locations identified by a feature on both the side rail and
the heating elements. Also, keep all objects a safe the cross rail. Cross rails must be secured in one of the
distance from the window to prevent damaging the seven detent locations on the side rail to prevent move-
heating elements. ment with a sudden stop. For improved wind noise
performance when cross rails are not in use, place them
in detent positions #2 (second detent from the front of the
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED vehicle) and #7 (detent closest to the rear of the vehicle)
External racks do not increase the total load carrying as indicated with a unique feature on the side rails.
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the rated vehicle capacity.
This vehicle is not equipped with roof rack cross rails as
built, unless ordered as optional equipment. Cross rails
must be installed prior to carrying loads on the roof rack.
If not equipped, your authorized dealer can order and
CAUTION! WARNING!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO NOT Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
carry any loads on the roof rack without cross rails vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
installed. The load should be secured and placed on top of
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
the cross rails, not directly on the roof. If it is necessary to
place the load on the roof, place a blanket or some other sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack 3
protection between the load and the roof surface. “Cautions” when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the rated load capacity of your cross rail system or
the roof rack system maximum load capacity of 150 lbs (68
kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible
and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such as
wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when
carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack. Wind forces,
due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can add
sudden upward loads. This is especially true on large flat
loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
m Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 ▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
4
m Instrument Cluster—Premium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 ▫ Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
m Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 ▫ Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
m Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) – If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 m Setting The Compass Variance And Compass
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ EVIC Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Compass/Temperature/Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Average Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
m Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 ▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
m Sales Code RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-Disc) Radio With
▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Optional Satellite Radio, Hands Free Phone, And
▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Vehicle Entertainment Systems (VES)
Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
m Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 199
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For CD Audio
m Sales Code REF — AM/FM/CD (Single Disc) Radio
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
With Optional Satellite Radio And Hands Free Phone
Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 ▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For CD Audio
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 192
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3 Audio
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . . 197
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — If
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . 210
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
m Sales Code REC — AM/FM/CD (6–Disc) Radio With ▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button (If
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If ▫ PTY Button 9Scan9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ PTY Button 9Seek9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ REC Setting The Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Audio Clock Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 4
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
m Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
m Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped . . 221
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
m CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In REF, And RAQ,
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 m Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 m Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels . . . . . . 219 ▫ Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

▫ Air Filtration System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 228
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 5 — Glove Box 9 — Hazard Warning Flasher

2 — Demisters 6 — Storage Bin 10 — ESP OFF Switch*
3 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Climate Control * If Equipped
4 — Radio 8 — Heated Seat Switches*
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER—PREMIUM
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 3. Electronic Throttle Control Indicator Light

This light informs you of a problem with the
1. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Location
Electronic Throttle Control system. If a prob-
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
lem is detected, the light will come on while the
the pointer will show the level of fuel remain-
engine is running. If the light remains lit with
ing in the fuel tank. The fuel pump symbol
the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable
points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel
and not need towing, however see your dealer for service
door is located 4
as soon as possible.
2. Charging System Light
If the light is flashing when the engine is running you
9This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
may experience power loss, an elevated/rough idle, and
ing system. The light should come on when the
increased brake pedal effort, and your vehicle may
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
require towing. Immediate service is required.
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non essential The light will come on when the ignition switch is first
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check. This is
the Charging System light remains on, it means that the normal. If the light does not come on during starting,
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See your local
authorized dealer.9
4. Oil Pressure Light 6. Speedometer

Shows low engine oil pressure. The light will come Indicates vehicle speed.
on and remain on when the ignition switch is
7. Airbag Light
turned from the OFF to the ON position, and the light
The light comes on and remains on for 6 to 8
will turn off after the engine is started. If the bulb does
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
not come on during starting, have the system checked by
switch is first turned ON. If the light does not
an authorized dealer.
come on during starting, stays on, or comes on
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop while driving, have the system checked by an authorized
the vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE dealer.
THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED.
8. Turn Signal Indicators
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine. The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior
This can be determined using the procedure shown in turn signal, when using the turn signal lever.
Section 7.
9. High Beam Indicator
5. Low Fuel Light This light shows that the headlights are on high
When the fuel level drops to 2 gallons, the fuel beam. Push the turn signal lever away from the
symbol will light and a single chime will sound. steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low
beam.
10. Anti-Lock Warning Light (ABS) — If Equipped on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light should
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System come on. If the light does not come on, have the system
(ABS) described elsewhere in this manual. This checked by an authorized dealer.
light will come on when the ignition key is
11. Seat Belt Reminder Light
turned to the ON position and may stay on for
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
as long as four seconds.
light will come on for about six seconds. A chime
If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving, will sound if you have not pulled the shoulder belt 4
it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system out of the retractor. This is a reminder to “buckle up”. If
is not functioning and that service is required, however, you do not buckle up, the light will remain on.
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
12. Tachometer
normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
on.
revolutions-per-minute (rpm x 1000) for each gear range.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock prevent engine damage.
Brakes.
13. Engine Temperature Warning Light
The warning light should be checked frequently to assure This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key to the tion. If the engine is critically hot, a warning chime
will sound 10 times. After the chime turns off, the engine NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
will still be critically hot until the light goes out. cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
14. Brake System Warning Light
the brake fluid level checked.
This light monitors various brake functions, in-
cluding brake fluid level and parking brake appli- If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
cation. If the brake light turns on, it may indicate that the sary.
parking brake is applied, there is a low brake fluid level
or there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system. WARNING!
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light 15. Transmission Over Temp Light
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair During sustained high speed driving on hot
to the ABS system is required. days, the automatic transaxle oil may become
too hot. If this happens, the transmission over-
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
heat indicator light will come on and the
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
vehicle will slow slightly until the automatic transaxle
the ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
cools down enough to allow a return to the requested
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless 4
speed. If the high speed is maintained, the overheating
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer. 16. Theft Alarm Light — If Equipped
This light will flash rapidly for several seconds when the
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
alarm system is arming. The light will begin to flash
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
slowly indicating that the system is armed.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
17. Temperature Gauge
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the 20. Transmission Range Indicator
pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
immediately and call for service. gear selection.
There are steps that you can take to slow down an 21. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Button
impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is Press this button to change the display from odometer to
on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to either of the two trip odometer settings. Trip A or Trip B
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer must be in trip
the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act mode to reset.
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
22. Tire Pressure Monitor Light
from the engine cooling system.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
18. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped should be checked monthly when cold and
This indicator shows that the Speed Control inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
System is ON. by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
19. Speed Control SET light.
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
This indicator shows that the Speed Control System is
SET.
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
tires.) low tire pressure telltale.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illumi-
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) nate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or be activated when one or more tire pressures is low. The
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord- Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on and 4
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you off for 60 seconds when a system fault is detected. The
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi- condition is removed and reset.
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
replacing the odometer/trip odometer, vehicle warning

CAUTION!
messages such as: door/gate ajar and loose gas cap.
The TPMS has been optimized for the original Loose gas cap will be displayed from the Odometer/Trip
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and Odometer on all models.
warning have been established for the tire size NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with the optional Elec-
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera- tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instru-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re- ment cluster, all warnings including “door”, and “gATE”
placement equipment that is not of the same size, will only be displayed in the EVIC display. For additional
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or ter — If Equipped” in Section 3.
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There-
23. Four-Wheel-Drive Light fore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
This light indicates the vehicle is in 4WD locked mode. replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
24. Odometer/Trip Odometer be determined.
A vacuum fluorescent display indicates the total distance
the vehicle has been driven. Also, the cluster will display,
25. OFF ROAD Light — If Equipped If the Malfunction Indicator Light flashes when the
The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the 4WD lock engine is running, serious conditions may exist that
switch is activated and the transmission range indicator could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
is in Low or Reverse position. converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
26. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system 27. Hill Descent Control Light — If Equipped
called OBD that monitors emissions, engine, and The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the 4
automatic transmission control systems. The light 4WD lock switch is activated and the transmis-
will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position sion range indicator is in Low or Reverse
before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when position (Off Road Mode).
turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condi-
28. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
tion checked promptly.
This light shows when the front fog lights are ON.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
29. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles at
Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light — speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
If Equipped rized dealer as soon as possible.
If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
31. 4WD! Malfunction Light
tion, apply as little throttle as possible. While
This light monitors the Four -Wheel-Drive
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
(4WD) system. The light will come on, for a
speed and driving to the prevailing road con-
bulb check, when the ignition key is turned to
ditions, and do not switch off the ESP, or TCS — if
the ON position and may stay on for as long as
equipped.
3 seconds.
30. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
When lit solid: There is an 4WD system fault. 4WD
The malfunction lamp for the ESP is combined
performance will be at a reduced level. Service the 4WD
with BAS. The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning
system soon.
Lamp” comes on when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position. They should go When blinking: The 4WD system is temporarily dis-
out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning abled due to overload condition.
Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the
BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition
32. Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display—If ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
Equipped (EVIC) – If Equipped
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages.
33. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Button—If Equipped 4
Pushing this button, will change the display to the
choices available for EVIC.
EVIC Location
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
tures a driver-interactive display. It is located in the lower Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
left part of the cluster below the fuel and engine tem- messages.
perature gauge. The EVIC consists of the following:
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
• System Status
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Vehicle information warning message displays
• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Personal Settings (customer programmable features)
• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
• Compass heading chime)
• Outside temperature display • Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
• Trip computer functions
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• UConnect™ hands-free communication system dis-
plays — If Equipped • Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park
(automatic transmissions) or vehicle is in motion
• Audio mode display
(manual transmissions).
• Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
• Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single EVIC Functions
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• Door (S) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
4
• Gate Ajar (with a single chime)
• Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
• Headlamps On
• Key In Ignition
EVIC Button
• Check TPM System
Press the EVIC button until one of the following func-
tions are displayed on the EVIC:
• Compass/Temperature/Audio
• Average Fuel Economy
• Distance To Empty (DTE) Compass/Temperature/Audio

• Elapsed Time Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight
compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is
• Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
facing, the outside temperature and the current radio
• Personal Settings station.
To Reset The Display For additional information regarding the compass, refer
Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the to Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)
function currently being displayed. Reset will only occur in this section.
if a resettable function is currently being displayed. To
Average Fuel Economy
reset all resettable functions, press and release the EVIC
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
button a second time within 3 seconds of resetting the
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
currently displayed function (Reset ALL will be dis-
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
played during this 3 second window).
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel reading before the reset.
Distance To Empty (DTE) Elapsed Time

Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel or START position.
tank level. This is not resettable.
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle Refer to Section 5, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System 4
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of (TPMS) for system operation.
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles estimated Features)
driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text This allows the driver to set and recall features when the
display of 9LOW FUEL9. This display will continue until transmission is in PARK (automatic transmission) or the
the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount vehicle is stopped (manual transmissions).
of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the 9LOW FUEL9 text
Press and release the EVIC button until Personal Settings
and a new DTE value will be displayed, based on the
is displayed in the EVIC.
current values in the DTE calculation and the current fuel
tank level. Use the EVIC button to display one of the following
choices:
Language Auto Unlock On Exit

When in this display you may select different languages When ON is selected all the vehicle’s doors will unlock
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions. when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects (manual transmissions) or the vehicle is stopped and the
English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais depend- transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position
ing on availability. As you continue the displayed infor- (automatic transmissions). Press and hold the EVIC but-
mation will be shown in the selected language. ton when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to
make your selection.
NOTE: UConnect™ language will not change using the
EVIC. Please refer to “Language Selection” in the Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) — IF When DRIVER’S DOOR 1ST is selected only the driv-
EQUIPPED section of this manual for details. er’s door will unlock on the first press of the remote
keyless entry unlock button and require a second press to
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)
unlock the remaining locked doors. When REMOTE
When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when
UNLOCK ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors will
the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Press
unlock at the first press of the remote keyless entry
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
unlock button. Press and hold the EVIC button when in
“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
this display until “DRIVER’S DOOR 1ST” or “ALL
DOORS” appears to make your selection.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock when exiting the vehicle. Press and hold the EVIC button
When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when when in this display until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears to make
the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is pressed. This your selection.
feature may be selected with or without the flash lights
Headlamps On With Wipers (Available with Auto
on lock/unlock feature. Press and hold the EVIC button
Headlights Only)
when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to
When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the
make your selection.
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi- 4
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the off if they were turned on by this feature. Press and hold
remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be the EVIC button when in this display until “ON” or
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature “OFF” appears to make your selection.
selected. Press and hold the EVIC button when in this
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to make your
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
selection.
brightness, refer to “Lights” in this section.
Delay Turning Headlamps Off
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
When this feature is selected, the power window
have the headlamps remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
switches, radio, hands–free system, power sunroof, and
power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes Display English or Metric
after the ignition switch has been turned off. Opening a The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system units can be
vehicle door will cancel this feature. Press and hold the changed between English and Metric.
EVIC button when in this display until “Off”, “45 sec.”,
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“5 min.”, or “10 min.” appears to make your selection.
“US” or “METRIC” appears to make your selection.
Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected the headlamps will activate Setting The Compass Variance And Compass
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are Calibration
unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter. Compass Variance
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
“OFF”, “30 sec.”, “60 sec.”, or “90 sec.” appears to make North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
your selection. country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
Confirmation of Voice Commands — If Equipped North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
When ON is selected all voice commands from the readings. In order to ensure compass accuracy, the com-
U-Connect system are confirmed. Press and hold the pass variance should be set to the zone number on the
EVIC button when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” compass variance map that corresponds to the current
appears to make your selection. location of the vehicle.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from

the Instrument Panel. This is where the compass sensor is
located.
4
To set the variance: with the ignition in the ON position, NOTE: The factory default Zone is 8. During program-
with a short button press (less than one second) press and ming, the Zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to
release the EVIC button several times until you have Zone 1.
displayed the Personal Settings (Customer Program-
Compass Calibration
mable Features) menu. Once in the Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features) menu, press and The Compass will automatically calibrate if the Cal
release (less than one second) the EVIC button several indicator is flashing, by driving around slowly (under 5
times until “Compass Variance” is highlighted. The mph / 8 km/h) in one or more complete circles in an area
“Compass Variance” message and the current variance free from large metallic objects or power lines, until the
zone number will be displayed. To change the zone, press Cal indicator turns off. If during normal use the compass
and hold (longer than two seconds) the EVIC button to appears erratic, inaccurate or abnormal, you may wish to
increment the variance one step. Repeat as necessary, manually calibrate the compass. Prior to calibrating the
with individual long (for at least 1 second) EVIC button compass make sure the proper zone is selected.
presses for each increment, until the desired variance is
To manually calibrate the Compass: start the engine and
achieved. To exit the Variance Programming, press the
leave the transmission in the PARK position. Using a
EVIC button with a short (less than one second) button
short button press (less than one second), press and
press.
release the EVIC button several times until the EVIC
displays the Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features) menu. Once in the Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features) menu, press and release (less RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
than one second) the EVIC button several times until
Radio Broadcast Signals
“Calibrate Compass (Yes)” is displayed. Using a long
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
button press (more than one second), pressing the EVIC
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
button will place the Compass in calibration mode. The
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-
Cal indicator will come on continuously in the EVIC
eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
display to indicate that the compass is now in the
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help 4
calibration mode and that the vehicle can now be driven
you understand and save you concern about these “ap-
to calibrate. (A short EVIC button press from the 9Cali-
parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
brate Compass (Yes)9 screen will exit the EVIC Customer
two about the transmission and reception of radio sig-
Programmable features, and return it to its normal oper-
nals.
ating mode). To complete the compass calibration, drive
the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circles Two Types of Signals
under 5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free from power lines, There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
large metallic objects, until the CAL indicator turns off. Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
The compass will now function normally. causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
Electrical Disturbances will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude, will cancel this feature.
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
carry the FM signal. The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the frequency and/or
AM Reception time in hours and minutes (depending on your radio
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception model) whenever the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines “ACC” position.
and neon signs.
When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position, or
FM Reception when the radio frequency is being displayed, time keep-
Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia- ing is accurately maintained.
tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear, On the AM/FM/CD (6-disc) radio the time button alter-
which is the major feature of FM radio. nates the location of the time and frequency on the
display. On the AM/FM/CD (single-disc) radio only one
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if of the two, time or frequency is displayed.
equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped)
Clock Setting Procedure SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC)

RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
Audio control.
side of your radio faceplate.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
/ Audio control to set the minutes. 4
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait approximately
5 seconds.
REF Radio
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode Mode Button (Radio Mode)

Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
Electronic Volume Control up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 tuned to the new station until you make another selec-
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the tion. Holding the button will bypass stations without
volume control to the right increases the volume and to stopping until you release it.
the left decreases it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
set at the same volume level as last played. speakers. 9MUTE9 will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
or turning ON/OFF the ignition, will cancel the MUTE
is ON.
feature.
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the Clock Setting Procedure
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
Audio control.
the next listenable station in either, AM, FM, or Satellite
(if equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each 3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will 4
the search, press SCAN a second time. begin to blink.
PSCAN Button (Radio Mode) 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio
Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan control.
through preset stations in either, AM, FM, or Satellite (if
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the RW/FF (Radio Mode)
search, press PSCAN a second time. Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
Time Button
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-
Press the time button and the time of day will display for
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
5 seconds.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode) Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency. adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode) Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes. display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
ers.
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit
decrease the Bass tones. setting tone, balance, and fade.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID RND/SET Button (Radio Mode) To SET The
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to Push-Button Memory
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones. When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button, Operation Instructions - CD Mode
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in 4
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
radio display.
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2 If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button mode and begin to play. The display will show the track
twice. number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track one.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display. NOTE:
• On some vehicles, you may insert or eject a disc with
Preset Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
the radio or ignition switch OFF.
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
• If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio SCAN Button (CD Mode)
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
Player. To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
• This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks. EJECT Button (CD Mode)
Press this button and the disc will unload and
SEEK Button (CD Mode)
move to the entrance for easy removal. The
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track
unit will switch to the last selected mode.
on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the
beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
seconds of the current selection.
TIME Button (CD Mode)
MUTE Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
speakers. 9MUTE9 will display. Press the MUTE button a
for 5 seconds.
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition RW/FF (CD Mode)
will also return the sound from the speakers. Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player
will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW
(Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
RND/SET Button (Random Play Button) (CD Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
Mode) The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the MP3 player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play
change of pace. through the vehicle speakers.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical 4
selected track. device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3.5
mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
the MODE button until AUX appears on the display.
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will NOTE: The radio will return to the last stored mode if
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing. the ignition switch is turned from the OFF/LOCK posi-
tion to the ACC position, the radio is turned on, and the
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
radio was previously in the AUX mode.
Play.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
MUTE Button (Auxiliary Mode) TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)

Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the Press this button to change the display from elapsed
speakers. 9MUTE9 will display. Press the MUTE button a playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
second time and the sound from the speakers will return. for 5 seconds.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
will also return the sound from the speakers.
No function.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
RND/SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Mode Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — If
PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode) Equipped
No function. Refer to the “HANDS FREE PHONE (UConnect™)”
section of the Owner’s Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If

Equipped
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s
Manual.
SALES CODE RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-DISC) RADIO

WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO, HANDS
FREE PHONE, AND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT 4
SYSTEMS (VES) CAPABILITIES
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
RAQ Radio
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) SEEK Button (Radio Mode)

Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio. listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
Electronic Volume Control
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
tuned to the new station until you make another selec-
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
tion. Holding the button will bypass stations without
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
stopping until you release it.
the left decreases it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
set at the same volume level as last played.
speakers. 9MUTE9 will be displayed. Press the MUTE
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down, button a second time and the sound from the speakers
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
is ON. radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
CD player, Satellite Radio, or Vehicle Entertainment MUTE button mutes the microphone.
System (VES) (if equipped).
SCAN Button (Radio Mode) 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for Audio control.
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
/ Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
begin to blink.
the search, press SCAN a second time.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
MSG or INFO Button (Radio Mode) 4
control.
Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station (one
with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
only).
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
Time Button to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
Press the time button and the time of day will be arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-
displayed for 5 seconds. lite (if equipped) frequencies.
Clock Setting Procedure TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode) Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes. display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
ers.
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
decrease the Bass tones. balance and fade.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones. 5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button or
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
turning the TUNE rotary knob within 5 seconds will
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL-
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
ANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or
types:
left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side
speakers.
16 Digit-Character Dis- Personality Personality

Program Type
play Public Public
No program type or un- Rhythm and Blues Rhythm_and_Blues
None
defined Religious Music Religious_Music
Adult Hits Adult_Hits Religious Talk Religious_Talk
Alert Alert Alert Alert Rock Rock
Classical Classical Soft Soft 4
Classic Rock Classic_Rock Soft Rock Soft_Rock
College College Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft_R_&_B
Country Country Sports Sports
Emergency Test Emergency Test Talk Talk
Foreign Language Foreign_Language Top 40 Top_40
Information Information Weather Weather
Jazz Jazz
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
News News
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
Nostalgia Nostalgia
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
Oldies Oldies function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program FM and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
will tune to the preset station. memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.
SET/DIR Button (Radio Mode) — To Set the
Push-Button Memory Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
When you are receiving a station that you wish to button number will be displayed.
commit to push-button memory, press the SET/DIR
Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this
commit to push-button memory {12AM, 12 FM, and 12
station and press and release that button. If a button is
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET/DIR
button, the station will continue to play but will not be Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio
stored into push-button memory. Play)
You may add a second station to each push-button by NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press position to operate the radio.
the SET/DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the
NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,12
compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks show the disc number, the track number, and index time
and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks. in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
radio display. return to the beginning of the current selection, or return 4
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
CAUTION! within the first 10 seconds of the current selection.
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs MUTE Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
CD player mechanism. speakers. 9MUTE9 will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF. radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play) LOAD / EJT - Eject
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the push-
CD currently playing. button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Play)
Radio display will show 9EJECTING DISC9 when the disc
LOAD/ EJECT - Load is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
Press and hold the LOAD/ EJT button for 5 seconds and
button with the corresponding number where
all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
DISC. After the radio displays 9LOAD DISC9 insert the 15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
CD into the player. the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
Radio display will show 9LOADING DISC9 when the disc
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
is loading, and “READING DISC” when the radio is
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
reading the disc.
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
9INSERT DISC” for 10 seconds. If no discs are inserted AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
within 10 seconds “NO DISCS LOADED” will be dis- Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
played.
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and MODE for CD Audio Play)
ignition OFF. Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting 4
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
change of pace.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
selected track.
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
works in a similar manner. feature.
TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play) Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone, Play.
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files • Maximum number of files: 255

The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
• Maximum number of folders: 100
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric- • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
tions.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 and a
Supported Media (Disc Types) 3-character extension)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 and a
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
3-character extension)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
Discs created with an option such as 9keep disc open after
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
writing9 are most likely multisession discs. The use of
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
longer disc loading times.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of directory levels: 15
Supported MP3 File Formats MPEG Specifi- Sampling Fre-

The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten- Bit rate (kbps)
cation quency (kHz)
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3 320, 256, 224,
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128,
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will 48, 44.1, 32
Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
not play the file. 56, 48, 40, 32
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to 160, 128, 144,
MPEG-2 Audio 112, 96, 80, 64, 4
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the 24, 22.05, 16
Layer 3 56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
16, 8
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
VBR bit rates. are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 Audio
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the Play)
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
time to start playing the MP3 files.
MP3 File. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected the beginning of the MP3 file. Pressing the button within
by the following: the first ten seconds plays the previous file.
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
CD-R media
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
to load than non-multisession discs button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
increase with more files and folders
DISC. After the radio displays 9LOAD DISC9 insert the
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended CD into the player.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
Radio display will show 9LOADING DISC9 when the disc
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
is loading.
writing to the disc.
LOAD / EJECT - Eject MSG or INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push- Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc.
button with the corresponding number where The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if avail-
and move to the entrance for easy removal. able).
Radio display will show 9EJECTING DISC9 when the disc
Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
9elapsed time9 priority mode. 4
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
message display priority mode or elapsed time display
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
priority mode will display the song title for each file.
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout. RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display the MP3 selection.
9INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio
TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
will go to the previous tuner mode.
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Switches back to Radio mode. Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner’s
RND/ PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Manual.
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Equipped)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Manual.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
to select a folder. System (VESt) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VESt)
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Guide.
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
SALES CODE REC — AM/FM/CD (6–DISC) RADIO menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destina-
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM tions and routes, AM/FM stereo radio and six-disc CD
changer with MP3 capability.
Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a
DVD that is loaded into the unit. One map DVD covers
all of North America. Refer to your “Navigation User’s
Manual” for detailed operating instructions. 4
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If
Equipped)
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
REC Setting the Clock
REC Radio GPS Clock
Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3 The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
Capability (REC) - combines a Global-Positioning the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The
System-based navigation system with an integrated color satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
screen to provide maps, turn identification, selection
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the sys- 2. To show the GPS clock, select “Displayed Clock: GPS
tem’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone Clock” and press ENTER.
and daylight savings information is set.
3. To adjust the time zone, Select “Time Zone” and press
1. At the Main Menu screen, highlight “Clock Setup” ENTER. Select the appropriate time zone and press
and press ENTER OR press and hold for 3 seconds the ENTER.
TIME button on the unit’s faceplate. The Clock Setup
4. To turn daylight savings on or off, select “Daylight
screen appears.
Savings” and press ENTER. Select “On” or “Off” and
press ENTER.
5. Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode. Press
ENTER to save your changes. If you press CANCEL or
NAV then your changes will not be saved.
User Defined Clock
If you wish to set the clock to a time different than the
system clock, you can manually adjust the time by
choosing the “User Defined Clock” option.
1. At the Clock Setup screen highlight “Displayed 3. To decrease the clock by one hour, use the Select
Clock: User Defined Clock”. Encoder to highlight the “-” sign. Press ENTER. Press
ENTER again to decrease the clock by another hour.
4. To increase the clock by minutes, make sure “MIN +”
is highlighted and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to
increase the clock by another minute.
5. To decrease the clock by minutes, use the Select 4
Encoder to highlight the “-“ sign. Press ENTER. Press
ENTER again to decrease the clock by another minute.
6. Select “DONE” to exit from the clock setting mode.
Press ENTER to save your changes. If you press CAN-
CEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved.
2. To increase the clock by hours, make sure “HR +” is Audio Clock Display
highlighted and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to
Select this option to change the size of the clock on the
increase the clock by another hour. You will see on the
audio screens.
“User Defined Time” display the number of hours you
have increased the clock by.
1. When you are at an audio screen, quickly press the

TIME button on the navigation faceplate.
2. In this example the large clock appears on the screen.
4. To toggle back to the large clock, simply press TIME.
3. To switch the clock to the small clock, quickly press

TIME again.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast- Number (ESN/SID)
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Num-
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel- ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
lite Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music, system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil- steps:
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
ESN/SID Access With REF Radios 4
System Activation With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and Time buttons
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following informa- twelve-digit ESN/SID number will be displayed. Press
tion available when activating your system: the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits.
Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
ESN/SID digits have been displayed. The SEEK DOWN
Number (ESN/SID).
will page down until the first four digits are displayed.
2. Credit card information. The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode when any other
button is pushed, the ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
has passed since any button was pushed.
ESN/SID Access With RAQ Radios Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ Radio
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word 9SAT9
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons appears in the display.
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID num-
These radios will also display the current station name
bers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID
and program type. For more information such as song
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is
title and artist press the MSG or INFO button.
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
was pushed. A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
ESN/SID Access With Navigation Radios
Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual. Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for
Selecting Satellite Mode in REF, and RAQ, Radios
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word 9SAT9 TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
appears in the display. the button is released.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The equipped)
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
moving on to the next channel. The word 9SCAN9 will radio.
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
PTY Button (SCAN(
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content 9SCAN9 button within five seconds. The radio will play 7 4
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-539- seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock- channel of the selected program type. Press the 9SCAN9
ing. Please have your ESN/SID information available. button a second time to stop the search.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels NOTE: Pressing the 9SEEK9 or 9SCAN9 button while
In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you performing a music type scan will change the channel by
may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the channel and stop the search.
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
PTY Button (SEEK( Reception Quality

When the desired program is obtained, press the 9SEEK9 Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
button within five seconds. The channel will change to following reasons.
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
Satellite Antenna structure or under a physical obstacle.
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
form of short audio mutes.
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be • Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items cause intermittent reception.
directly on or above the antenna. The luggage rack (if
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
equipped), should also not be positioned directly above
cause signal blockage.
the antenna.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
EQUIPPED button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to switch will decrease the volume.
access the switches.
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio or CD.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push 4
button in the center. The function of the left hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons. following precautions:
CD Player 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next surface.
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
wiping from center to edge.
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play. 3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc. 4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
The button in the center of the left hand switch changes
CD’s on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
button does not function for all other radios.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES

Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be 4
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Climate Controls
Climate Control Location
The Climate Control System allows you to balance the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains Mode Control (Air Direction)
R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer The mode control allows you
in the upper atmosphere. to choose from several pat-
terns of air distribution. You
The controls are as follows:
can select either a primary
Fan Control mode, as identified by the
Use this control to regulate symbols, or a blend of two of
the amount of air forced these modes. The closer the
through the system in any control is to a particular
mode you select. The fan mode, the more air distribu-
speed increases as you move tion you receive from that
the control to the right from mode.
the OFF position.
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct air
flow.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the Defrost

upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer Air is directed through the windshield and side
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
comfort during sunny but cool conditions. mum fan and temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets and side NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
window demist outlets with a small amount both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if 4
through the defrost outlet. the Air Conditioning Snowflake button is not pressed.
This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To
Mix
improve fuel economy, use these modes only when
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
necessary.
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at Air Outlets
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control
air flow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear seat passen- NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
gers, the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed, so lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
that the left center outlet is directed toward the right rear denser: located in front of the radiator, for an accumula-
passenger and the right center outlet is directed toward tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
the left rear passenger. from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the
Temperature Control
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Use this control to regulate
the temperature of the air in- Air Conditioning
side the passenger compart-
MAX A/C
ment. The blue area of the
For maximum cooling use the
scale indicates cooler tem-
A/C and recirculate buttons
peratures while the red area
at the same time.
indicates warmer tempera-
tures.
NOTE: See “Circulation Control” later in this section, Circulation Control

for proper or extended use of this position. Use this button to choose be-
tween outside air intake or
Air Conditioning (Normal)
recirculation of the air inside
Use this button to engage the
the vehicle. A lamp will illu-
Air Conditioning. A lamp will
minate when you are in recir-
illuminate when the Air Con-
culate mode. Only use the re-
ditioning System is engaged. 4
circulate mode to temporarily
Once the air conditioning is
block out any outside odors,
engaged, use a combination
smoke, or dust and to cool the
of the mode control, fan
interior rapidly upon initial
speed control, and tempera-
start up in very hot or humid weather.
ture control to achieve your
desired interior temperature.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
NOTE: Continuous use of the recirculate mode may charcoal layer. The filter will reduce, but not eliminate,
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may diesel and agricultural smells. The filter acts only on air
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. coming from outside the vehicle; it does not filter air
inside the passenger compartment. See the maintenance
In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculate
schedule for the filter change interval. The air filter
position will cause windows to fog on the inside because
change interval coincides with engine oil and filter
of moisture build up inside the vehicle. For maximum
change intervals. As with oil changes, the interval is
defogging, select the Outside Air position.
shorter for heavy duty service or dusty conditions. See
NOTE: Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor, mix your authorized dealer for service.
or defrost modes.
Air Filtration System – If Equipped
An air filter is included in the optional Security Group.
Filter media includes a particle filtration layer and a
Operating Tips
4
Window Fogging vehicle. For maximum defogging, press the recirculation

Vehicle side windows tend to fog on the inside in mild button until recirculate is off.
rainy or humid weather. To clear the windows, set mode
Summer Operation
to the mix or defrost position. Direct the panel outlets
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high-
toward the side windows. Do not use recirculate without
quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
A/C for long periods as fogging may occur.
protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re- protection against overheating. A 50% concentration is
moved by using the defrost position. recommended.
If the fogging problem persists, clean the inside window Outside Air Intake
surfaces. The cause of undue fogging may be dirt collect- When operating the system during the winter months,
ing on the inside surface of the glass. make sure the air intake, directly in front of the wind-
shield, is free of ice, slush, snow or other obstructions
NOTE: In cold weather, the use of the recircu-
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air-intake plenum
late position will cause windows to fog on the
may reduce air flow and plug the plenum water drains.
inside because of moisture build up inside the
The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use toward the side windows when the system is in either the
only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
vehicle operation. the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is at each end of the
instrument panel. These nonadjustable outlets direct air
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
m Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 ▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . . 241
▫ Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 ▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System . 241
▫ Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 ▫ Gear Ranges For Continuously Variable
5
Automatic Transaxle (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
m Manual Transaxle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
▫ Extremely Cold Weather (Below 220°F
Or 229°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 ▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 ▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 m Four Wheel Drive System — If Equipped . . . . . . 246
m Automatic Transaxle — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 240 m Patriot Freedom Drive II – Safe Off-Road
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle ▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Airing Down For Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Freedom Drive II 4WD System Operation . . . . 248
▫ Vehicle Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Freedom Drive II – Off-Road Features . . . . . . . 249
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ High Mobility Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
m Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Water Fording Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
m Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ The Basics Of Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If
▫ When To Use Low (L Off-Road) With The 4WD Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Lock Lever Engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
m Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation . . 255
m Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 280
High Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 281
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
m Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 ▫ Base Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Operation – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
m Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 289
m Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 290
m Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 5
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
m Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ Gasoline Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
m Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 ▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 ▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
m Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
m Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
m Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 322
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . . 309
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
m Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep
WARNING! in your car. Accidents can be caused by inadvertently
moving the gear selection lever or by pressing the
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
accelerator pedal. This may cause excessive heat in
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
the exhaust system, resulting in overheating and
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries.
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the 5
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle. Automatic Transaxle
The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of Park.
Manual Transaxle
WARNING!
Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,
press the clutch pedal to the floor and place the gear Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
selector in NEUTRAL. started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
NOTE: The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal axle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
is pressed to the floor. enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
NOTE: If key won’t turn and steering wheel is locked, If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.
the locking mechanism and then turn the key. This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-
Normal Starting erly, so follow the procedure carefully. See section 6
Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine does of this manual for jump starting instructions.
not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal.
Simply turn the ignition switch to the “START’” position
and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to Extremely Cold Weather (below 220°F or 229°C)
start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
“OFF” position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the externally powered electric engine block heater (available
normal starting procedure. from your dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails to Start

CAUTION!
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure, it may be flooded. To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15 15 seconds before trying again.
seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the After Starting
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure. The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up. 5
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the

throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE — IF EQUIPPED • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle
speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into
any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down
while shifting out of Park.
Automatic Shift Lever
CAUTION!
Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following

precautions are not observed:
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the transaxle will not

WARNING!
shift out of park. Battery power is required to release the
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or brake/transmission interlock system. There is a remov-
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If able plug in the right side of the shifter housing that
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle allows you to insert your finger to override the system.
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You The key must be in the ignition and in the on position to
could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or use the override lever. If this occurs obtain service as
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is soon as possible.
idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
the brake pedal.
5
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON positions, and
Brake/Transmission Interlock System the brake pedal is depressed.
This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out
of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
switch is in the ON or ACC positions. Always depress the feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
brake pedal first, before moving the gear selector out of stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
PARK. service.
Gear Ranges For Continuously Variable

WARNING!
Automatic Transaxle (CVT)
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
NEUTRAL positions into another gear range. those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
“P” Park you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmis- running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
sion. The engine can be started in this range. Never use P shift the vehicle into P (Park), remove the key from
(Park) while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the
brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. Always key is removed from the ignition, the transmission
apply the parking brake first, and then place the selector shift lever is locked in the P (Park) position, securing
in P (Park) position. the vehicle against unwanted movement. Further-
more, you should never leave children unattended
inside a vehicle.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that

you have engaged the transmission shift lever into the P
(Park) position:
• When shifting into P (Park), firmly move the lever all “N” Neutral
the way forward until it stops. Engine may be started in this range.
• Look at the shift indicator window on the console to “D”
ensure it is in the P (Park) position.
This should be used for most driving and provides the
• You must depress the brake pedal to move the shift best ratio for optimum driveability, fuel economy, and
lever out of the P (Park) position. performance.
“L” Low
CAUTION!
This range should be used for maximum engine braking 5
Before moving the shift lever out of P (Park), you when descending steep grades. In this range, the trans-
must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the axle will ratio up only to prevent transaxle damage or
steering wheel and shift lever are released. Other- engine over speed while ratioing down will occur as
wise, damage to the steering column or shifter could early as possible
result. You must also depress the brake pedal.
“R” Reverse
Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OPERATION Fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelera-
WARNING! tor pedal.
You or others could be injured if you leave the

vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
5 – Speed Shift Pattern

Use each gear in numerical order - do not skip a gear. Be Recommended Shift Speeds
sure the transaxle is in FIRST gear, (not THIRD), when To use your manual transaxle for optimal fuel economy,
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch it should be upshifted as listed in table.
can result from starting in THIRD. Manual Transaxle Recommended Shift Speeds
For most city driving you will find it easier to use only Units in mph (km/h)
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light Accel-
Engine
accelerations, 5th gear is recommended. eration 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5
Size
Rate
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal All En- Accel 14 (23) 23 (37) 29 (47) 45 (72) 5
gines Cruise 12 (19) 18 (29) 25 (40) 32 (52)
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch. Downshifting
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
prolong engine life.
complete stop.
NOTE: During cold weather, until the transaxle lubri-
cant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift
efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle.
Four Wheel Drive System — If Equipped

CAUTION!
This feature provides full time, on-demand, Four Wheel
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting Drive (4WD).
or downshift at too high a vehicle speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift

down to 2nd or 1st when descending a steep grade.
When turning a corner, or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur-
dened.
Four Wheel Drive Switch

Where one or more wheels have wheel spin or if addi-
tional traction is needed in sand, deep snow, or loose
traction surfaces, activate the 4WD Lock switch by pull- satisfying recreation. Before you venture out you should
ing up once and releasing. This locks the center coupling contact your local governmental agency to determine
allowing more torque to be sent to the rear wheels. The what are the designated off-road vehicle (ORV) trails or
amber 94WD9 light will come on in the cluster. This can be recreation areas. You should always tread lightly and
done on the fly, at any vehicle speed. To deactivate, only use established roads, trails or ORV recreational
simply pull on the switch one more time. The cluster light areas. The National Forest Service, Bureau of Land Man-
will then go out. agement or local Department of Natural Resources are a
wealth of information and usually have maps with
NOTE: Refer to ”ESP (Electronic Stability Program) in
marked trails.
the “Electronic Brake Control System” section of this 5
manual for additional information. NOTE: For optimum off-road performance, premium
fuel is recommended. However, your vehicle is
PATRIOT FREEDOM DRIVE II – SAFE OFF-ROAD equipped with an active spark knock system and can
DRIVING adjust the engine calibration for varying range of fuel
Off-Road Driving Tips and Vehicle Characteristics octane levels.
The Patriot with the Freedom Drive II Off-Road package The Patriot’s Freedom Drive II Off-Road Package
has excellent on and off-road capabilities. These off-road The Jeep Patriot with the Freedom Drive II has excellent
capabilities will allow you to explore those wilderness capability on and off-road.
trails where few travel, providing a source of exciting and
The package includes: • Unique off-road engine calibration for optimum off-
road performance with premium fuel
• 2.4L DOHC 16-Valve I4 (172 bhp @ 6000 rpm, 165 lb-ft
@ 4400 rpm) • Off-road Brake Traction Control
• Second generation continuously variable transaxle • Unique off-road Anti-lock brake calibration
(CVT2L) with 19:1 crawl ratio
• Heavy duty cooling package (Eng/larger CVT oil
• Tow Hooks: 2 front and 1 rear cooler, High capacity cooling fans)
• Front engine and transaxle skid plate • Heavy duty alternator
• Fuel tank skid plate • Improved body sealing and high located drivetrain
component vents
• Air filtration system
• Reinforced rear lateral links
• Unique springs for a 1 inch of increased ride height
Freedom Drive II 4WD System Operation
• Fog lamps
Under normal driving conditions, the vehicle operates in
• Seat height adjust the active four wheel drive mode. Pulling up on the 4WD
lock lever activates the 4WD system and lights the amber
• Three-mode Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
4WD cluster light. This commands a higher torque to the
• Hill-descent control rear wheels, for improved traction capability on slippery
roads. The active four wheel drive mode has the same the system has the 4WD lock lever engaged and is in
functionality with the Freedom Drive I system. Shifting the Low Off-Road mode or reverse. Hill descent
the transaxle gear select lever into Low Off-Road mode braking can be turned off by turning off ESP. The hill
with the 4WD lock lever active, lights the amber off-road decent control speed varies between 4-6 mph (6 -10
and 4WD cluster lights. This off-road mode gives the km/h) forward, 3 mph (5 km/h) reverse.
combined benefits of a 19:1 crawl ratio, hill descent
• Off-Road Brake Traction Control – When conditions
braking, optimum off-road performance with premium
warrant, the vehicle braking system transfers torque
fuel, and off-road brake traction control for improved
from side to side. It does not control throttle input
traction capability off-road. In low, the transaxle (CVT2L)
unlike normal traction control which is active in 5
initially maintains the 19:1 crawl ratio before changing
normal drive mode.
ratio. This low ratio is ideal for crawling over obstacles.
• 19.1 Crawl Ratio – When the system has the 4WD lock
Freedom Drive II – Off-Road Features
lever engaged and is in the Low Off-Road mode, the
The following are key off-road features which are active
CVT2L initially maintains the 19:1 crawl ratio before
when the system has the 4WD lock lever engaged and is
changing ratio. This low ratio is ideal for crawling over
in the Low Off-Road mode.
obstacles.
• Hill descent Braking – Hill descent braking uses the
• 4WD Lock Mode – Four wheel drive lock mode
vehicle braking system to provide a controlled descent
commands a higher torque to the rear wheels, for
down varying grades. This feature is only active when
improved traction capability off-road. It also, turns on High Mobility Characteristics

other system features in conjunction with L Off-Road The Patriot with the Freedom Drive II Off-Road package
mode. has high off-road mobility characteristics with an ap-
proach angle A= 29 degrees, a break-over angle B= 23
• Unique Engine Calibration – When the system has
degrees, a running ground clearance C= 9 ins. (23 cm), a
the 4WD lock lever engaged and is in the Low
departure angle D= 33 degrees, and a turning circle of
Off-Road mode or reverse, the engine calibration
35.6 ft. (11 m).
changes to run higher spark advance with premium
fuel for optimum off-road performance. Your vehicle is
equipped with an active spark knock system and can
adjust the engine calibration for varying range of fuel
octane levels.
Angles A B C D
Water Fording Characteristics fording characteristics with the ability to cross a pool of
Water Fording Characteristics is the vehicle’s ability to water, without stopping, 19 ins. (48 cm) deep at a
cross a body of still water, where the powertrain and maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) with an entrance
drivetrain are safe from water ingestion. The Patriot with ramp angle of 1.3 degrees.
the Freedom Drive II Off-Road package has high water
Water Fording Characteristics

The Basics of Off-Road Driving

CAUTION!
You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-
road. You should be familiar with the terrain and area Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
before proceeding. There are many types of surface combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle
conditions: hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, exhaust system could cause a fire.
mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on
your vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Control-
ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road
driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel WARNING!
and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases there are no
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an
road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore
off-road situation.
you will need to use your own good judgment on what is
safe and what isn’t. When on a trail you should always be
looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in When To Use Low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while Lock Lever Engaged
remembering what you are currently driving over. When To Use Low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD Lock
Lever Engaged When driving off-road, shift into low (L
Off-Road) and activate the 4WD Lock. This will provide
additional traction and activates the numerous off-road Driving in Snow, Mud and Sand
features to improve handling and control on slippery or There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in
difficult terrain. Due to the sustained lower gearing, low snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive to
(L Off-Road) with 4WD Lock engaged will allow the steering, acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore you
engine to operate in a higher power range. This will should accelerate slowly, leave greater stopping distances
allow you to cross over obstacles and descend hills, with and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a
improved control and less effort. slow constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the
vehicle’s momentum.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the simulta- • Snow – In heavy snow or for additional control and 5
neous use of the brake and throttle (two footed driving). traction at slower speeds, activate the 4WD Lock and
When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects, shift the transmission to a low (L Off-Road) if neces-
using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the sary. Don’t shift to a lower gear than necessary to
vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is also maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin
used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a the wheels and traction will be lost. If you start to slow
steep incline. to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than
a 1/4; turn quickly back and forth, while still applying
throttle. This will allow the tires to get a fresh 9bite9
and help maintain your momentum.
hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if there are
CAUTION!
any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high recovered if stuck.
engine rpm’s or vehicle speeds because engine brak- • Sand – Soft sand is very difficult to travel through
ing may cause skidding and loss of control. with full tire pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots
in a trail maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do
not stop. The key to driving in soft sand is to use the
• Mud – Deep mud creates a great deal of suction appropriate tire pressure, accelerating slowly, avoid-
around the tires and is very difficult to get through. ing abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle’s
You should use low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD Lock momentum. If you are going to be driving on large soft
engaged and maintain your momentum. If you start to sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a
slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire
more than a 1/4; turn quickly back and forth for surface area. You should use low (L Off-Road) with the
additional traction. Mud holes pose an increased 4WD Lock engaged and ESP turned off. Reduced tire
threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck. They are pressure will drastically improve your traction and
normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting handling, while driving on the soft sand, but you must
stuck. As a good practice before entering any mud return the tires to normal air pressure before driving
on pavement or other hard surfaces. Be sure you have Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the
a way to air the tires back up prior to reducing the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle
pressure. forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the
throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and
CAUTION! ease the vehicle up and over the object.
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and WARNING!

total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt loading which could cause you to loose control of 5
maneuvers. your vehicle.
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Using A Spotter

Points) There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle
While driving off road, you will encounter many types of or determine the correct path. Determining the correct
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting
types of obstacles. Before proceeding review the path many obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you
ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person
to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong.
stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see

CAUTION!
the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and
guide you through. Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
Crossing Large Rocks enough to contact the door sills.
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which
ensures you drive over the largest of them with your
tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut
The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large
wall and is designed to take the abuse. Always look rut, the angled approach is the key to maintaining your
ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with vehicle’s mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45-
your tires. degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle
independently. You need to use caution when crossing
CAUTION! large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross
any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great
Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough enough to put the vehicle at risk of a roll over. If you get
to strike your axles or undercarriage. caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed
dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created.
CAUTION!
You should now be able to drive out following the trench
you just created at a 45-degree angle. Do not attempted to cross a log with a greater
diameter than the running ground clearance or the
WARNING! vehicle will become high centered.
There is an increased risk of roll over when crossing
an obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides. Getting High Centered
If you get hung up or high centered on an object, get out
of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is 5
Crossing Logs
hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody and
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approxi-
what is the best direction to recover the vehicle. Depend-
mately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be
ing on what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up
on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the
and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off
log. While climbing the log, modulate your brake and
of the high point when you let the vehicle down. You can
accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your
also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off
tires. Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
the object.
or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover

CAUTION!
the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects looks good and you feel confident, then you should
increases the risk of underbody damage. use low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD Lock engaged and
proceed with caution maintaining your momentum as
you climb the hill
Hill Climbing • Driving Up Hill – Once you have determined your
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under- ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropri-
standing of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations. ate gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep possible run. Accelerate with an easy constant throttle
to climb and should not be attempted. You should always and apply more power as you start up the hill. Do not
feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You race forward into a steep grade, the abrupt change of
should always climb hills straight up and down. Never grade could cause you to lose control. If the front end
attempt to climb a hill on an angle. begins to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring
• Before Climbing A Steep Hill – As you approach a all four tires back on the ground. As you approach the
hill consider its grade or steepness. Determine if it is crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed
too steep. Look to see what the traction is on the hill over the top. If the wheels start to slip as you approach
side trail. Is the trail straight up and down? What is on the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain
top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches headway by turning the steering wheel no more than
a 1/4; turn quickly back and forth. This will provide a distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the
fresh 9bite9 into the surface and will usually provide vehicle descends to fast? If you feel confident in your
enough traction to complete the climb. If you do not ability to proceed then make sure you are in low (L
make it to the top, place the vehicle in reverse and Off-Road) with the 4WD Lock engaged and proceed
back straight down the grade using engine resistance with caution. Allow engine and hill descent braking to
along with the vehicle brakes. control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary,
but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn 5
around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline Do not descend a steep grade in neutral. Use vehicle
increases the risk of a roll over, which may result in brakes in conjunction with engine braking. Descend-
severe injury. ing a grade too fast could cause you to lose control
and be seriously injured.
• Driving Down Hill – Before driving down a steep hill

you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe • Driving Across An Incline – If at all possible avoid
descent. What is the surface traction? Is the grade too driving across an incline. If it is necessary, know your
steep to maintain a slow controlled descent? Are there vehicle’s abilities. Driving across an incline places
obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty of more weight on the down hill wheels, which increases
the possibilities of a down hill slide or roll over. Make

WARNING!
sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable
soils. If possible transverse the incline at an angle If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
heading slightly up or down. make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
WARNING! tipping and rolling the vehicle, which may result in
severe injury. Always back carefully straight down a
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a roll
hill in R (Reverse) gear. Never back down a hill in N
over, which may result in severe injury.
(Neutral) using only the vehicle brakes. Never drive
diagonally across a hill, always drive straight up or
• If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway – If you stall down
or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill,
allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately
Driving Through Water
apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift to R
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
(Reverse). Back slowly down the hill allowing engine
Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only
and hill descent braking to control the descent and
be attempted when necessary, in a safe responsible
apply your brakes if necessary, but do not allow the
manner. You should only drive through areas which are
tires to lock
designated and approved. You should tread lightly and
avoid damage to the environment. You should know

CAUTION!
your vehicles abilities and be able to recover it if some-
thing goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer
vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive
water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls do not too fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause
attempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested water permanent damage to engine, driveline or other
first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. You want vehicle components and your brakes will be less
to use low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD Lock engaged and effective once wet and/or muddy.
proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed {3-5 mph
(5–8 km/h) maximum} and light throttle. Keep the ve- 5
hicle moving; do not try to accelerate through the cross-
ing. After crossing any water higher than the bottom of
the axle differentials, you should inspect all of the vehicle
fluids for signs of water ingestion.
• Before You Cross Any Type Of Water – As you accurate water depth, approach angle, and bottom
approach any type of water you need to determine if condition. Murky or muddy water holes are where
you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering. This
out and walk through the water or probe it with a makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery.
stick. You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, If you are able to determine you can safely cross, than
current and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or proceed using the low and slow method.
muddy waters, check for hidden obstacles. Make sure
you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can CAUTION!
recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe
crossing is the water depth, current and bottom con- Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec-
ditions. On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in, tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle. Be
sure to consider this when determining the depth and
the ability to safely cross • Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or Other
Flowing Water – Flowing water can be extremely
• Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other dangerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running
Standing Water – Puddles, pools, flooded or other stream or river even in shallow water. Fast moving
standing water areas normally contain murky or water can easily push your vehicle downstream
muddy waters. These water types normally contain sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow water,
hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an a high current can still wash the dirt out from around
your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy.

WARNING!
There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle
damage with slower water currents in depths greater Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can
than the vehicle’s running ground clearance. You push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of
should never attempt to cross flowing water which is control. This could put you and your passengers at
deeper than the vehicle’s running ground clearance. risk of injury or drowning.
Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle
downstream out of control if the water is deep enough
to push on the large surface area of the vehicle’s body. Airing Down For Off-Road Driving
Before you proceed determine the speed of the current, Running lower tire pressure off-road can improve your 5
the water’s depth, approach angle, bottom condition ride comfort and vehicle traction. Reducing the tire air
and if there are any obstacles, then cross at an angle pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly, improving its
heading slightly upstream using the low and slow surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or
technique. form to the ground contour. Different terrain, tires, and
vehicles require different tire pressure. Hard surfaces like
rock and heavier vehicles require higher pressures than
softer surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles. You will
need to experiment to determine what is right for your
situation. It is easier and faster to let air out than it is to
replace it so, start high and lower it as required. Remem- Vehicle Recovery
ber you must return the tires to normal air pressure If you drive off-road, you may encounter a situation
before driving on road or at highway conditions. Be sure where you will need to recover your vehicle. Vehicle
you have a way to return the tires to their normal on road recovery should always be given consideration before
air pressure. attempting a questionable obstacle. You should never go
off-road driving without the ability to recover your
CAUTION! vehicle from a situation. Having another vehicle with
you usually works best for most situations. The first
Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire dam- thing to do is assess the situation. Why are you stuck?
age and may cause tire unseating with total loss of air Are you hung up on something? Would it be easier to go
pressure. To reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at forward or to go backward? Can you still move the
a reduced tire pressure, drive at slower speeds and vehicle? Are you alone or do you have another vehicle to
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. help? Is there high risk of vehicle damage during the
recovery process? Answering these questions will help
you determine the best method of recovery. If you can
still move the vehicle slightly and the only issue is slick
ground, then rock cycling your vehicle would be the first
choice. If you have ample room, an additional vehicle
and there is low risk of vehicle impingement on the
surroundings, then using a tow strap to the vehicle tow vehicle from drive to reverse, while applying throttle
hooks would be fast and easy. If the vehicle is severely after each shift. During this process, for additional
hung up or in a situation where great care needs to be traction, try turning your steering wheel quickly back
taken during the recovery, then nothing can do the job and forth no more than a 1/4 turn. If you are stuck in
better than a winch. If you are severely hung up on mud, sand, or snow try spinning your tires during this
something you should jack the vehicle up and stack process to clean the debris from the tread and improve
something under the wheels to allow the vehicle to roll the traction. You want to create a rocking motion with
off the object without causing further damage. This the vehicle. This helps build vehicle momentum,
should be tried before attempting any recovery method. which hopefully gets you out. Remember to ease off
and on the accelerator before and after the shift. If after 5
CAUTION! a few rock cycles your vehicle is not free, stop and try
another method of recovery. Continuous rock cycling
Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle, without first will only cause unnecessary damage to your vehicle
clearing the object, may result in additional under- and the environment.
body damage.
• Rock Cycling Your Vehicle – Rock cycling your ve-

hicle is one of the easiest, fastest and most commonly
used methods. This simply involves shifting your
the vehicles to allow for a safe recovery. If necessary

CAUTION!
join two tow straps together using a 1 1/2 in. (4 cm)
Damage can occur when spinning your tires at an hard wood dowel. This will keep the straps from
excessive high speed. Do not spin your tires faster becoming knotted and is safer than using a clevis pin
than an indicated 30 mph (48 km/h) if the strap breaks. Next have the tow vehicle backup,
leaving 2 to 3 ft. (61 to 91 cm) worth of slack in the
strap. Then the tow vehicle, using light throttle, should
• Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap – Tow accelerate tightening the strap providing the pulling
straps are a quick and easy way to recover your force needed to free the vehicle. The vehicle being
vehicle from minor situations if you have a secondary recovered should assist in the recovery, at the time of
vehicle which is not stuck. The tow hooks on your the snap, by slowly spinning the tires in the same
vehicle are designed to take the abusive force gener- direction as the pulling vehicle. After the vehicle
ated during vehicle recovery. Do not use the bumper becomes free, the driver of the previously stuck ve-
or any other vehicle component as an attachment hicle should signal they are free and should hit their
point. Using tow straps requires coordination between brakes stopping both vehicles. The driver of the pull-
the two drivers. Good communication and line of sight ing vehicle should let off the throttle without using the
are required for a safe recovery. First connect the tow brakes, once signaled by the other driver. This se-
strap to the correct attachment points on both vehicles. quence is important to avoid having the recovered
There should be a least 20 to 30 ft. (6 to 9 m) between vehicle hit the pulling vehicle.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on

WARNING!
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
straps with a clevis pin. These heavy metal objects values specified in the Service Manual.
could become projectiles if a strap breaks, which • Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
could cause severe injury. Never leave more than 2 to things could be a fire hazard, or they might hide
3 ft. (61 to 91 cm) of slack in the strap. More slack damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals,
than this greatly increases the risk of injury and and propeller shafts.
vehicle damage. Always keep everyone at least 30 ft.
(9 m) away from a strapping or winching situation. • After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or 5
similar dirty conditions, have brake drums and rotors,
brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as
After Driving Off-Road soon as possible.
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than • If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
does most on-road driving. After driving off-road, it is mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
always a good idea to check for damage. packed material. Packed foreign material can cause a
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. wheel imbalance and cleaning the wheels will correct
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and the situation.
exhaust system for damage.
If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is

WARNING!
moving, a chime will sound to alert the driver. The chime
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle has
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might returned to a stop.
not have full braking power when you need it to Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
prevent an accident. If you have been operating your brake is set. To set the parking brake, pull up firmly on
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked the lever. Also place the gear selector in the Park position
and cleaned as necessary. Failure to do so may result (automatic transaxle) or Reverse (manual transaxle). To
is serious injury. release the parking brake, apply the brake pedal, pull up
slightly on the lever, then depress the button on the end
of the lever and push the lever fully down toward the
PARKING BRAKE floor.
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition on, the Brake Light in the instrument NOTE: The parking brake lever will not release unless
cluster will come on. the lever is pulled up slightly past its applied position.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is

on. It does not show the degree of brake application.
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the

curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a
uphill grade.
You should always apply the parking brake before leav-
ing the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving

children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
5
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
Parking Brake Lever
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
brake before placing the gear selector in Park, otherwise
the load on the automatic transaxle locking mechanism • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
may make it difficult to move the selector out of Park. As before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
BRAKE SYSTEM If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa-
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as bility, the remaining system will still function with some
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications by increased pedal travel during application and greater
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. How- pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the
ever, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
greater than that required with the power system oper- fluid in the master cylinder drops, the brake warning
ating. indicator will light.
WARNING! WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting ous. A significant decrease in braking performance or
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally vehicle stability during braking may occur. It will
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full vehicle harder to control. You could have an accident.
braking capacity in an emergency. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped

WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle
stability and brake performance under most braking Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping
brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
wheel lock-up. on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
5
The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake

WARNING!
System. The light will come on when the
• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural ignition switch is turned to the ON position
laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
brakes and tires or the traction afforded. is not functioning and that service is required. However,
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including the conventional brake system will continue to operate
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro- If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
can prevent accidents. brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous bulb repaired as soon as possible.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not function-
ing. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you • and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some end of the stop.
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
WARNING!
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in- electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interfer-
5
debris, or panic stops.
ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
You also may experience the following when the brake capability. Installation of such equipment should be
system goes into Anti-lock: performed by qualified professionals.
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
• the clicking sound of solenoid valves, type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
• brake pedal pulsations, accurate signals for the computer.
POWER STEERING
WARNING!
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability Continued operation with reduced power steering
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
steering capability if power assist is lost. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering CAUTION!
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers. Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
occur.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION • European Metric tire sizing is based on European

design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
Tire Markings
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter 9P9 is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
• LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced- 5
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
NOTE:
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded • High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex- standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
ample: P215/65R15 95H. into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
(....blank....( = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—9R9 means Radial Construction.
—9D9 means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-
der specified operating conditions (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and 5
posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
(....blank....( = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including of the tire.
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
Tire and Loading Information

This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
Tire Placard Location
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
and spare tires. occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
Loading combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You the weight referenced here.
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” sec- pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
tion of this manual. your vehicle’s placard.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual. sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capaci-
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.)
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity 5
NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
calculated in Step 4.
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your (392 kg).
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
1. Safety—
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!

can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause acci-
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the dents.
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never • Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire
overload them. failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION result in tire failure. 5
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You
Tire Pressure could lose control of your vehicle.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and • Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the
other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended
cold tire inflation pressure.
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump-
tion.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the Tire Placard Location
face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B” pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as (1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to sure molded into the tire sidewall.
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
temperature changes.
CAUTION! Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12 °F (7 °C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al- when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in 5
ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This the winter.
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Example: If garage temperature = 68 °F (20 °C) and the
outside temperature = 32 °F (0 °C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12 °F (7 °C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)

WARNING!
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low. High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very mph (120 km/h).
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial-Ply Tires Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
WARNING! radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle stalled at the first opportunity.
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case WARNING!
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires. Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only. 5
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph (80
km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs. replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare. tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
vehicle at the first opportunity.
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
result.
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
limited use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped (or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use result in loss of vehicle control.
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
Tire Spinning Tread Wear Indicators

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for more than 30 seconds. replaced.
Refer to the paragraph on “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in
Section 6 of this manual.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-

5
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30
mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and don’t let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread

WARNING!
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years,
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
point. could lose control and have an accident resulting in
serious injury or death.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to: Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
• Driving style exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
• Tire pressure
Replacement Tires
• Distance driven The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading

WARNING!
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend dimensions and performance characteristics, result-
that you contact your original equipment or an autho- ing in changes to steering, handling, and braking of
your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire and stress to steering and suspension components.
specifications or capability. You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel 5
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.

CAUTION!
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
may result in false speedometer and odometer avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
readings. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
— IF EQUIPPED
Alignment And Balance Base Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Poor suspension alignment may result in: Operation – If Equipped
• Fast tire wear. This is the Tire Pressure Monitoring System warn-
ing indicator located in the instrument cluster.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear. • The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
• Vehicle pull to right or left. vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right. • The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12 °F (6.5 °C). This means that
for proper diagnosis. when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pres-
sure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as placard pressure in order for the TPM warning lamp to
the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for be turned off. The system will automatically update
more than 3 hours - and in outside ambient tempera- and the TPM warning lamp will extinguish once the
ture. Refer to the “Tires – General Information” in this updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle
section for information on how to properly inflate the may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as mph (25 km/h) to receive this information.
the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
cold (parked for more than 3 hours) placard of 35 °F (241
• The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68 °F (20 °C) and the 5
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pres- measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a temperature
sure warning threshold for any reason, including low drop to 20 °F (-7 °C) will decrease the tire pressure to
temperature effects. approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
• The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of
Monitoring Light”. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Light” will still be ON. In this
recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire
situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Light” will turn
pressure warning has been illuminated, the tire pres-
OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s
sure must be increased to the recommended cold
recommended cold placard pressure value.
Premium System – If Equipped • Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to Center (EVIC)
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
• Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module. Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illumi-
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
nate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
the proper pressure.
pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once
The TPMS consists of the following components: every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects. In
addition, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
• Receiver Module
(EVIC) will display a graphic of the pressure value(s)
• 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors with the low tire(s) flashing.
• 3 Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four wheel
wells)
NOTE: These display settings may not be available due

to Regulatory Authorities. In this case, the display will
only show approved units.
NOTE: A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Lamp to illuminate or the chime to
sound.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic 5
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value. The system will automatically update, the
Low Tire Pressure Display graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop flash-
Display Settings ing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp will extin-
guish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been re-
• Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,
ceived. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
kPa, or BAR.
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this infor-
mation.
Check TPM System Message

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 60 seconds, and an audible chime will sound
when a system fault is detected. The flash cycle will
repeat every ten minutes, without an audible chime, until
the fault condition no longer exists.
The EVIC will display the “CHECK TPM SYSTEM”
message for 3 seconds. This text message is then followed
by a graphic, with “- -“ displayed for the pressure value
indicating which of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sen-
sor(s) is not being received.
Check TPM System Display
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, and the 9CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM9 text message will no longer display.
Display Settings EVIC. This text message will then be followed by a

graphic, with “- -“ in place of the flashing low pressure
• Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,
value. For every subsequent key cycle, the “Tire Pressure
kPa, or BAR.
Monitoring Lamp” will be ON, a chime will sound, a
NOTE: These display settings may not be available due “CHECK TPM SYSTEM” text message will be display in
to Regulatory Authorities. In this case, the display will the EVIC, and the graphic display will have “- -“ in place
only show approved units. of the pressure value of the spare tire location. Once the
original road tire has been properly repaired, and put
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
back onto the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire.
wheel and tire assembly that does not have a tire pressure 5
The TPMS will update the graphic display on the EVIC
monitoring sensor. Therefore, it will not be monitored by
with a new tire pressure value instead of “- -“, and the
the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). In the event
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp” will be OFF as long as
that the compact spare tire is swapped with a low
none of the road tire(s) are below the low pressure
pressure road tire, the next ignition key cycle will still
warning threshold. The vehicle may need to be driven for
show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp” to be ON, a
up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this
chime to sound, and the Electronic Vehicle Information
information.
Center (EVIC) will still show the low tire pressure value
flashing on the graphic display. However, driving the
vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) will
display a “CHECK TPM SYSTEM” text message on the
CAUTION! CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
been established for the tire size equipped on your moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor which could damage the wheel rim sensor.
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not NOTE:
use tire sealant from a can, or balance beads if your • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
sensors may result. failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire • This device must accept any interference received,
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and including interference that may cause undesired op-
stopping ability. eration.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain following licenses:
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Pressure Monitoring Telltale lamp. Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, TIRE CHAINS
5
and the TPM system will monitor the actual tire Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom-
pressure in the tire. mended.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and CAUTION!
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions: Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
SNOW TIRES Tire Rotation Recommendations

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
designation on the tire sidewall. unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
safety and handling of your vehicle. aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
smooth, quiet ride.
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/h). Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected before rotating. The suggested recommended. The use of premium gasoline will provide
rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the no benefit over high quality regular gasolines, and in
diagram. some circumstances, may result in poorer performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these 5
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the ap-
propriate octane rating for your engine) before consider-
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ing service for the vehicle.
GASOLINE ENGINES Reformulated Gasoline

Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis- Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
sion regulations and provide excellent fuel burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
economy when using high quality regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
87. The use of premium gasoline is not
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-

CAUTION!
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality. DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso- Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro- and driveability problems and may damage critical
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen- While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
ates are required in some areas of the country during the does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in MMT In Gasoline
your vehicle. MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num-
ber. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom- Fuel System Cautions

mends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump, CAUTION!
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not
his/her gasoline contains MMT. Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States. • The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu- Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance, 5
lated gasolines. damage the emission control system.
Materials Added to Fuel • An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition

All gasoline sold in the United States is required to malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
you should not have to add anything to the fuel. Contact your dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol. • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
the responsibility of the manufacturer. garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
against you.
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
WARNING!
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon windows fully open.
monoxide poisoning: • Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
CAUTION!
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys-
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left side tem could result from using an improper fuel tank
of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle. impurities into the fuel system.
CAUTION! 5
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top

Fuel Filler Door
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the Malfunction
fuel tank is full. Indicator Light will come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
tank filled. portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
in violation of most state and federal fire regula- ground while filling.
tions and will cause the malfunction indicator
light to turn on.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you filler cap is loose or improperly installed, a “GASCAP”
hear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly message will be displayed in the Odometer/Trip Odom-
tightened. eter in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Description” in Section 4 of this manual. Tighten
the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer/trip
odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time TRAILER TOWING
the vehicle is started. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic In this section you will find safety tips and information
System — OBDII” in Section 7 of this manual for more on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
information. with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
VEHICLE LOADING safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
Vehicle Loading Capacities
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
Front Seat Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
hicles used for trailer towing. 5
Rear Seat Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 lbs. (80 kg) Common Towing Definitions
Vehicle Rated Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . 925 lbs. (420 kg) The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) you in understanding the following information:
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
This includes the weigh of your vehicle, the driver, The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
passengers, cargo and trailer tongue weight. The total This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
GVWR. exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
9loaded and ready for operation9 condition. The recom- rear GAWR.
mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer WARNING!
must be supported by the scale.
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when control of the vehicle and have an accident.
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings in-
clude a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a
driver). Tongue Weight (TW)
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or
more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area Weight-Distributing Hitch

The maximum height and maximum width of the front of A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
a trailer. age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
Trailer Sway Control
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
swaying motions while traveling. 5
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
Weight-Carrying Hitch contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
hitches are the most popular on the market today and and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with gross
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
trailers.
The following chart provides the industry standard for

WARNING!
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per- correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
formance, and could result in an accident. Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible given drivetrain.
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Trailer Hitch Classification
Vehicle dealer for additional information. Class Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Trailer Hitch Classification Class II - Medium 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of Duty
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your dealer for package Class IV - Extra 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
content. Heavy Duty
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Rat-
your vehicle. ings)
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight The following chart provides the maximum trailer
Ratings) weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
5
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Max. Tongue Wt. (See
Wt.) Note 1)
2.4L Auto/Man 22 Sq. Ft. (2.04 Sq. m) 1000 lbs (450 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
2.4L Auto/Man with Trailer
32 Sq. Ft. (3.0 Sq. m) 2000 lbs (450 kg) 225 lbs (102 kg)
Tow Prep Package (AHC)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Note 1 – The trailer tongue weight must be considered as Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire– which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Safety Information Section in this manual. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on • The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
your bumper or trailer hitch. put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual 5
for the maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv-
Consider the following items when computing the
etrain components the following guidelines are recom-
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
mended:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
CAUTION! WARNING!
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
your vehicle. as safe as possible:
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h). and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR, have an accident.
or GCWR, ratings.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-

load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-
sis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the (This requirement may limit the ability to always
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough percentage of total trailer weight).
slack for turning corners.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
spare tire.
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
P for Park. Always, block or 9chock9 the trailer wheels. − Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe 5
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
Tires–General Information section of this manual on
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
− Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
ratings are not exceeded:
pressures before trailer usage.
1. GVWR
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
2. GTW before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
3. GAWR
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
− When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Infor- − Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires lbs (907 kg).
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits. CAUTION!
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
This could cause inadequate braking and possible could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
personal injury. brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin

WARNING!
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy- and connector.
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys- NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes wiring harness.
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front 5
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle

but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
7- Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
4 - Pin Connector and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission Towing Tips — Cooling System

The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than heating, take the following actions:
45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule “B” in
− City Driving
section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
intervals.
in neutral but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
− Highway Driving
before towing.
Reduce speed.
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If 5
− Air Conditioning
Equipped)
Turn off temporarily.
− Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
− refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed Maintenance section of this manual for more informa-
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until tion.
you can get back to cruising speed.
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four
MOTORHOME, ETC.) wheels are off the ground.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
towing with all four wheels on the ground)
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the driv-

etrain will result.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
m Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 m Jump-Starting Procedures Due To A Low
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
m If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
m Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
m Automatic Transaxle Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . 326
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
m Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 6
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
m Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
m Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
▫ With Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition
key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the flasher may wear down
your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

Hazard Warning Flasher In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
The flasher switch is located on the instrument tion.
panel, below the radio. Depress the switch and
both cluster indicators and all front and rear • On the highways — Slow down.
directional signals will flash. Depress the • In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
switch again to turn Hazard Warning Flashers off. neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle
and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. with the engine at idle, when safe. Turn off the air
conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red)

CAUTION!
mark for more than a minute, turn the engine off imme-
diately and call for service. Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle,
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to when safe. Turn the air conditioner off and wait until
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C the pointer drops back into the normal range. After
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature appropriate action has been taken, if the pointer
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately,
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act and call for service.
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat 6
from the engine cooling system.
requested speed. If the high speed is maintained, the

WARNING!
overheating will reoccur, as before, in a cyclic fashion.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your WARNING!
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to Section 7, Maintenance, of this • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
System Pressure Cap paragraph. could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OVERHEATING need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up service center where it can be raised on a lift.
long grades on hot days, the automatic transaxle oil may
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
become too hot.
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
If this happens, the transmission overheat in- vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
dicator light will come on, and the vehicle will be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slow slightly until the automatic transaxle slippery areas.
cools down enough to allow a return to the
Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage

The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor The spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor in the
in the cargo area. cargo area.
Spare Tire Removal
Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.
Preparations For Jacking
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK (automatic transaxle) or REVERSE
(manual transaxle). Turn OFF the ignition.
6
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

Spare Tire and Jack Stowage vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.

• Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally oppo-
site the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
• Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the
vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the Jacking Locations
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left
CAUTION!
to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from
the jack assembly. Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning locations other than those indicated in step 3.
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
3. There are two front jacking locations and two rear

WARNING!
jacking locations on each side of the body. The front
locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts, the rear Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
ones by two rectangular cutouts. For vehicles equipped the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
with plastic trim, the plastic has been cut away to expose hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
the jacking locations in the body. to remove the tire.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift 6
head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the provides maximum stability.
wheel to be changed. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is securely engaged. 6. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off the hub.
Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten
the nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left. 10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the
tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
8. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while tightening the wheel nuts. Alternate nuts until each
WARNING!
nut has been tightened twice. Correct wheel nut torque is
100 ft. lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station. the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
9. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is immediately.
free. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and
stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using
the means provided. 11. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
pressure as required.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or

hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES DUE TO A LOW

WARNING!
BATTERY
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
WARNING! started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
axle cannot be started this way and may be damaged.
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
once the engine has started, ignite and damage the
switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged
battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly, so follow this proce- 6
dure carefully.
NOTE: Disconnecting the battery with the ignition in

WARNING!
the On position will cause vehicles with an automatic
Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry transaxle (CVT2) to go into “default mode” and turn on
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an the malfunction indicator light. See your authorized
inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously dealer to correct this condition.
injured. 1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boosting from a battery in another vehicle, park
that vehicle within booster cable reach but without
letting the vehicles touch. Set parking brake, place auto-
matic transaxle in PARK (manual transaxle in NEU-
TRAL) and turn ignition to OFF for both vehicles.
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Remove the air intake duct covering the battery, using
the two finger screws on the cover.
5. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive 6. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of of the booster battery and then to the negative terminal of
the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the dis- the discharged battery. Make sure you have a good
charged battery. contact.
7. If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobi-
WARNING!
lizer, turn the ignition switch to the ON position for 3
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START
battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t position.
lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the 8. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes or battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
on skin, flush the contaminated area immediately engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. 6
with large quantities of water.
9. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the se-
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam- quence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away from
the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output that exceeds 12
volts.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Traction

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
Acceleration
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
be observed:
(driving) wheels.
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
WARNING! slushy.
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. 2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the 3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle visible.
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction 4. Keep tires properly inflated.
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.). 5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

WARNING!
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con-
trol, turn the system OFF before attempting to “rock” the Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
vehicle. ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause axle, tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the continuously without stopping when you are stuck.
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse And don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
and First gear. Usually the least accelerator pedal pres- matter what the speed.
sure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective. 6
All Transaxles
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast CAUTION!

may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY posi-
30 mph (48 km/h). Do not spin the wheels continu-
tion, not in the LOCK position.
ously for more than 30 seconds.
Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when
towing. When securing vehicle to flat bed truck, do
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
With Ignition Key towing.
Automatic And Manual Transaxle
Front-wheel-drive vehicles must have the front wheels
elevated; Four-wheel-drive vehicles must be hauled on a If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
flatbed truck. (wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the
transaxle remains in NEUTRAL.
Without The Ignition Key Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
with the ignition in the LOCK position. A dolly should be
used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised. CAUTION!
Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam-
age to the vehicle. DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the driv-
etrain will result.
Battery power is required to release the brake/
transmission interlock system. There is a removable plug
in the right side of the shifter housing that allows you to
insert your finger to override the system. The ignition
key must be in the on position to use the override lever. 6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m Engine Compartment — Gasoline Engines . . . . . 342 ▫ Drive Belt – Check Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
m Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . . . 343 ▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 ▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
m Emissions Inspection And Maintenance ▫ Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . 353
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 7
m Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Air Cleaner Element (Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
m Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
m Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 ▫ Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD/4WD Models
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Windshield Washer Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
m Fuses/Integrated Power Module (IPM) . . . . . . . 376
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
m Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
m Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 365
m Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
▫ Fuel System Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
▫ Automatic Transaxle (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ Tail Lights, Rear Turn Signals And Backup Lights
▫ Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 — Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
▫ Rear Drive Assembly (RDA )– AWD/4WD Models ▫ License Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplight . . . . . . . . . . . 387
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341
m Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

m Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 388 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — GASOLINE ENGINES

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors • Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic tor Light” on could cause further damage to the
transaxle control systems. When these systems are oper- emission control system. It could also affect fuel
ating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent per- economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
formance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions serviced before any emissions tests can be per-
well within current government regulations. formed.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system • If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
also store diagnostic codes and other information to verter damage and power loss will soon occur.
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Immediate service is required.
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not 7
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can PROGRAMS
determine if the fuel filler cap is possible loose or In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
improperly installed. A GASCAP message will be dis- an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
played in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
a 9clicking9 sound is heard. This is an indication that the
For states, which have an I/M (Inspection and
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
reset button to turn off the message. If the problem
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Light)
persists, the message will appear the next time the
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
for testing.
turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL light off. Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test, ignition key or start the engine. This means that your
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you should not
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do proceed to the I/M station.
the following:
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch. illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD system
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
or start the engine.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
this test over.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you you may need to do nothing more than drive your
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
bulb check. system to update. A recheck with the above test routine 7
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen: Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
with the engine running. against you.
REPLACEMENT PARTS WARNING!

Use of genuine Mopart parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in- You can be badly injured working on or around a
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
caused by the use of non-Mopart parts for maintenance have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
warranty. service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not
services determined by the engineers who designed your check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat
vehicle. overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is
cold will give you an incorrect reading.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
7
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
Engine Oil Dipstick
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and Change Engine Oil
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
range markings on the dipstick. The range markings will following list to decide if any apply to you.
consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a cross-
• Day and night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
hatch zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and
MAX at the high end of the range. Adding one quart of • Stop and Go driving.
oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated
• Extensive engine idling.
range will result in the oil level at the full end of the
indicator range. • Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
CAUTION!
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine as speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
indicated by the range markings, as described above,
on the engine oil dipstick will cause oil aeration, • Trailer towing.
which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase • Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service).
in oil temperature. This could damage your engine.
• Off-Road or desert operation.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months, Identification Symbol
whichever comes first, and follow schedule “B—All This symbol means that the oil has
Engines” of the 9Maintenance Schedules9 section of this been certified by the American
manual. Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
API Certified engine oils.
at every interval shown on schedule “A” in the mainte-
nance schedule section of this manual.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first. Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
Engine Oil Selection (Gasoline Engines) temperatures. This engine oil improves low tempera- 7
For best performance and maximum protection for all ture starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil
engines under all types of operating conditions, the filler cap also states the recommended engine oil vis-
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer- cosity grade for your engine.
tified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler
Material Standard MS-6395.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi- Disposing of Used Engine Oil
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from
ber should not be used. your vehicle. Used oil, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact your
Synthetic Engine Oils
dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice
There are a number of engine oils being promoted as
on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in
either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use
your area.
such a product, use only those oils that are American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified and have the recom- Engine Oil Filter
mended SAE viscosity grade. Follow the maintenance The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
schedule that describes your driving type. oil change.
Materials Added To Engine Oils Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi- All of this manufacturers engines have a full-flow type
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consider-
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad- ably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
ditives. most efficient service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Drive Belt – Check Condition Catalytic Converter

At the mileage shown in the maintenance schedules, The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
check the drive belt for condition. only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Inspect the drive belt for evidence of cuts, cracks, or
glazing and replace belt if any sign of damage which Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
could result in belt failure. verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
The belt is self-tensioning and will not need adjustment.
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
Spark Plugs damage.
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-
mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-
stalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark 7
plug. Refer to the Engine data Label located under the
hood for the proper type of spark plug for use in your
vehicle.
CAUTION! WARNING!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In materials that can burn. Such materials might be
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv- grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor- system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin- where your exhaust system can contact anything that
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe can burn.
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle. In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune up to manufacturers specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage: Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or
plugging deposits. Replace if necessary.
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in Fuel Filter
motion. A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the
speed at which a vehicle can be driven. Should an
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank,
vehicle.
frequent filter replacement may be necessary. The fuel
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires filters are located inside the fuel tank. See your dealer for
disconnected for prolonged period. service.
Crankcase Emission Control System Air Cleaner Element (Filter)
Proper operation of this system depends on freedom Under normal driving conditions, replace the filter at the
from sticking or plugging due to deposits. As vehicle intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you drive
mileage builds up, the PCV valve and passages may the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions, 7
accumulate deposits. If a valve is not working properly, the filter element should be inspected periodically and
replace it with a new valve. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on Schedule
CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE! “B”.
WARNING! CAUTION!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection When servicing the battery, always reinstall the bat-
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air tery thermowrap. The thermowrap provides battery
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or heat protection and will extend overall battery life.
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the Failure to reinstall the thermowrap can result in
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with evaporative loss of the battery fluid.
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Maintenance-Free Battery
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING! CAUTION!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn It is essential when replacing the cables on the
or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid to battery that the positive cable is attached to the
contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over a positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.
large amounts of water. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame and free of corrosion. Apply grease to posts and
or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a booster clamps after tightening.
battery or any other booster source with an output If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable clamps to vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
touch each other. connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a “fast 7
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories con- charger” to provide starting voltage as battery dam-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after age can result.
handling.
Air Conditioner Maintenance

WARNING!
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
at the start of each warm season. This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
time. unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling

WARNING!
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar-
bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro- Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
using recovery and recycling equipment. power steering fluid.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, or Refrigerants. If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
Power Steering — Fluid Check surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined for correct fluid types.
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be 7
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are Front Suspension Ball Joints
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici- There are two front suspension lower ball joints that are
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified permanently lubricated. Inspect these ball joints when-
DaimlerChrysler Dealership. ever under vehicle service is done. Damaged seals and
their corresponding potentially damaged ball joints must
be replaced.
Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
seat tracks, doors, liftgate and hood hinges, should be windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation mild nonabrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli- will remove accumulations of salt, waxes or road film
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be and help reduce streaking and smearing.
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
nents to insure proper function. When performing other
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
remove frost or ice from the windshield. make sure that
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopart Lock gasoline, etc.
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the glass.
2. Push the release tab and slide the wiper blade assem- when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
bly down along the arm. Gently place the wiper arm on have a competent technician inspect the complete ex-
the windshield. haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
3. Install the new blade assembly onto the wiper arm tip
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
until it locks in place.
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
Windshield Washer Reservoir exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the rear of the change or lubrication. Replace as required.
engine compartment on the right side and should be
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the WARNING!
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze). Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Exhaust System Breathing it can make you unconscious and can 7
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this
system. manual.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system,
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or
Cooling System Coolant Checks

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
WARNING! months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis- system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
controlled and can start at any time the ignition spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
switch is in the ON position. face of the condenser.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open the at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never leaks.
try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator is hot. Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove

CAUTION!
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution. Mixing of coolants other than specified Hybrid Or-
Selection Of Coolant ganic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolants,
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer may result in engine damage and may decrease
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant is intro-
coolant type. duced into the cooling system in an emergency, it
should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon
as possible.
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and 7
may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
Adding Coolant The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles before
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
nance period, it is important that you use the same
the vehicle is operated.
coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review
these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Addi- NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
tive Technology (HOAT) coolant. engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% rec-
ommended Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Cooling System Pressure Cap
Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technol- The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
ogy), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use higher coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
234°F (237°C ) are anticipated.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children

WARNING!
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre- ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
caution. Never add coolant when the engine is immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to Coolant Level
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald- determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera-
the system is hot or under pressure. ture, the level of the coolant in the bottle should be
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines, shown on the
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en- bottle.
gine damage may result. The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is 7
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
be checked once a month.
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the • Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
not overfill. added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
Points To Remember
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
sure tested for leaks.
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- • Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
enter the radiator. corrosion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be • Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
• Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install plings to make sure the are secure and no leaks are
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may present.
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
mileage, and increased emissions.
any evidence of degradation that could cause failure.
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Fuel System Connections
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
designed with tubes and special connects, connections
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
and clamps which have unique material characteristics to
sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber
provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deterio-
Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat rated gasoline.
sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose rout-
ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or
You are urged to use only the manufactures-specified 7
tubes, connections and clamps, or their equivalent in
moving component that may cause heat damage or
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing.
mechanical wear.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed
Brake System brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake sive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particu-
system components should be inspected periodically. lar attention should be made to examining those hose
Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte- surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust
nance Section. manifold.
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they
WARNING!
are secure and no leaks are present.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting collapsed.
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and NOTE: Often, fluids such as oil, power steering fluid,
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera-
braking capacity in an emergency. tions to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. There-
fore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not neces-
sarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot
Brake And Power Steering System Hoses fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle
When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance, operation) should be noted before a hose is replaced
inspect the surface of the hoses and nylon tubing for based on leakage.
evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard and
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be done when- fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
ever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked
change. when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
WARNING!
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a Manual
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure. Transaxle , the Brake Fluid Reservoir supplies fluid to
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of both the Brake System and the Clutch Release System.
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak
hoses replaced immediately. in one system will not affect the other system. The
Manual Transaxle Clutch Release System should not
require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If
Brake Master Cylinder the Brake Fluid Reservoir is low, and the brake system
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked does not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be 7
when performing under hood services, or immediately if a result of a leak in the Hydraulic Clutch Release System.
the brake system warning lamp is on. See your local authorized dealer for service.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid, refer
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake type.
WARNING! WARNING!
Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
boiling point or unidentified as to specification, may spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged brake fluid catching fire.
braking. You could have an accident.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed

container to avoid contamination from foreign matter.
CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall brake fluid as seal damage will result!
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of Automatic Transaxle (CVT)
clutch function and the ability to shift the transaxle. Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance. Use
only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
fluid which has been formulated with special metal to
metal friction coefficient additives to provide the proper
steel belt traction on the drive and driven pulleys. Refer Fluid and Filter Changes
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule located if section 8 of
type. this manual for the correct change interval for your type
of driving.
CAUTION!
Special Additives
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac- Do not add any materials (other than leak detection dyes)
turers recommended fluid will cause belt slip and to Continuously Variable Transaxle (CVT) Fluid
result in a complete transmission failure! Refer to (CVTF+4). CVTF+4 is an engineered product and its
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
fluid type. tives.
Manual Transaxle
Fluid Level Check Lubricant Selection 7
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be Use only manufacturers recommended transmission
checked only by a trained technician. fluid. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for
correct fluid type.
Fluid Level Check Rear Drive Assembly (RDA )– AWD/4WD Models

Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid Only
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
Lubricant Selection
point not more that 3/16” (4.7 mm) below the bottom of
Use only manufacturers recommended fluid. Refer to
the hole.
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. type.
Frequency Of Fluid Change Fluid Level Check
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at Visually inspected the unit at each oil change for leakage.
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of If leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the the fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained be-
following conditions exist: tween the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 inch (4 mm)
below the fill hole.
• The lubricant has become contaminated with water. If
contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
immediately.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
• If severe usage has occurred, refer to Maintenance Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule located if section 8 of
Schedule “B” in Section 8 of this manual. this manual for the correct change interval for your type
of driving.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD/4WD Models Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Only
Protection Of Body And Paint from Corrosion
Lubricant Selection Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
Use only manufacturers recommended fluid. Refer to graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
type. trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
Fluid Level Check
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
Visually inspected the unit at each oil change for leakage.
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
If leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
the fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained be-
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
tween the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 inch (4 mm)
body protection.
below the fill hole.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable 7
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
Frequency Of Fluid Change resistance built into your vehicle.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule located if section 8 of
What Causes Corrosion?
this manual for the correct change interval for your type
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
of driving.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are: • Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
scratch the paint.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
• Insects, tree sap and tar. that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
• Salt in the air near sea coast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. CAUTION!
Washing Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve- as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch
hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car metal and painted surfaces.
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear
water.
Special Care
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
Tar Remover to remove. near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges • Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
open. color of your vehicle.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
considered the responsibility of the owner. chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
heavy soil, use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabra-
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
sive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
sibility of the owner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective 7
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well finish.
packaged and sealed.
YES Essentialst Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider Equipped
mud or stone shields behind each wheel. YES Essentialst seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
with a clean, dry towel. leather upholstery.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
• For tough stains, apply Mopart Total Clean or a mild
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• For grease stains, apply Mopart Multi-purpose and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
• Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen-
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
tials products.
required to maintain the original condition.
Interior Care
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Glass Surfaces
WARNING!
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household-
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window
equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter
window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use
Cleaning Headlights scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. Instrument Panel Cover
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which 7
minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To protectants or other products which may cause undesir-
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
lowed by rinsing. low glare surface.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are buckles do not work properly.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Dry with a soft tissue.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be FUSES/INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (IPM)
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive An Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center
rag. contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A label that
identifies each component may be printed on the inside
2. Dry with a soft tissue. of the cover. Refer to “Engine Compartment” in this
Seat Belt Maintenance section of the owner’s manual for the underhood location
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical of the Integrated Power Module (IPM).
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
1 Empty Empty 9 40 Amp Power Seats
2 15 Amp AWD/4WD ECU Green
Lt. Blue Feed 10 20 Amp CCN Power Locks
3 10 Amp CHMSL Brake Switch Yellow
Red Feed 11 15 Amp Power Outlet
4 10 Amp Ignition Switch Feed Lt Blue
Red 12 20 Amp Ign Run/Acc Inverter
5 20 Amp Trailer Tow Yellow
Yellow 13 20 Amp Pwr run/Acc Outlet
6 10 Amp IOD Sw/Pwr Mir/ Yellow RR
Red Ocm Steering Cntrl 14 10 Amp IOD CCN/ Interior 7
Sdar/Hands Free Red Lighting
Phone 15 40 Amp RAD Fan Relay Bat-
7 30 Amp IOD Sense1 Green tery Feed
Green 16 15 Amp IGN Run/Acc Cigar
8 30 Amp IOD Sense2 Lt. Blue Ltr/Sunroof
Green
Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
17 10 Amp IOD Feed Mod-Wcm 25 10 Amp Heated Mirror
Red Red
18 40 Amp ASD Relay Contact 26 15 Amp ENG ASD Relay Feed
Green PWR Feed Lt. Blue 2
19 20 Amp PWR Amp 1 & Amp 27 10 Amp IGN RUN Only ORC
Yellow 2 Feed Red Feed
20 15 Amp IOD Feed Radio 28 10 Amp IGN RUN ORC/OCM
Lt. Blue Red Feed
21 10 Amp IOD Feed Intrus 29 Hot Car (No Fuse Re-
Red Mod/Siren quired)
22 10 Amp IGN RUN Heat/AC/ 30 20 Amp Heated Seats
Red Compass Sensor Yellow
23 15 Amp ENG ASD Relay Feed 31 10 Amp Headlamp Washer
Lt. Blue 3 Red Relay Control
24 15 Amp Power Sunroof Feed 32 30 Amp ENG ASD Control
Lt. Blue Pink Feed 1
Cavity Cartridge Mini Description CAUTION!

Fuse Fuse
33 10 Amp ABS MOD/J1962 • When installing the Integrated Power Module
Red Conn/PCM cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
34 30 Amp ABS Valve Feed erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
Pink may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
35 40 Amp ABS Pump Feed Module, and possibly result in an electrical system
Green failure.
36 30 Amp Headlamp /Washer • When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
Pink Control / Smart Glass use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
37 25 Amp 110 Inverter The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
Natural may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it 7
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE LIGHTS BULBS — Outside Bulb No.

If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 Low Beam/High Beam Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . H13
days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery. Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker Light . . 3157NAK
You may: Front Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
• Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution Center High Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) . . LED As-
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw). sembly
Rear Tail/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Rear Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157AK
Backup Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W16W (921)
REPLACEMENT BULBS License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb Number

Front Header Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T578
Center Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T578
Rear Cargo/Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–A35LF
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamps
Releasing Red Lock Tab

7
Locating Headlamp Connector
• Raise the hood and locate connector behind the head-
lamp.
• Reach into engine compartment and pull red lock out

at connector.
Twisting Bulb From Socket

• Twist the bulb to the left and pull outward from
Remove green connector from back of bulb by pulling assembly.
straight back
NOTE: These are halogen bulbs. Take care not to touch Fog Lights
the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from your fingers See your authorized dealer for replacement.
could cause excessive heat buildup which reduces bulb
life.
Removing Halogen Bulb From Assembly

Tail Lights, Rear Turn Signals And Backup Lights

— Replacement
1. Remove the two push-pins from the tail light housing.
Push-Pins Removed
2. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly to disengage the
lamp from the aperture panel.
Removing Push-Pins
Pulling Lamp From Body Removing Socket and Bulb

3. Twist and remove socket from lamp. 7
4. Remove bulb from socket and replace. License Lights

1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the
snap tab to remove the lamp from the liftgate.
Removing Bulb From Socket
Prying Lamp from Liftgate

2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
Removing Socket from Lamp Removing Bulb From Socket

3. Pull bulb from socket. Center High-Mounted Stoplight 7
Light is an LED assembly. See your authorized dealer for
replacement.
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 13.5 Gallons 51.0 Liters
Engine Oil-With Filter
All Gasoline Engines (Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine 4.5 Quarts 4.26 Liters
Oil.)
Cooling System *
Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Miles Formula), or 7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
equivalent.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Or-
ganic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts

Engine Oil Filter Mopart 04884900AB or equivalent.
Spark Plugs Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com-
partment.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane (R + M)/2
Chassis
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.
Automatic Transaxle (CVT) Fluid Mopart CVTF + 4
Manual Transaxle Fluid Mopart ATF+4 MS9602
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) Mopart Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 80W-90 API GL 5 or equivalent non-
synthetic product.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Mopart Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 80W-90 API GL 5 or equivalent non-
synthetic product.
7
Brake Master Cylinder Mopart DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids or equivalent.
Power Steering Reservoir Mopart Power Steering Fluid +4 or MopartATF+4 Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES N
T
E
N
A
CONTENTS N
C
E
m Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 392 ▫ Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
S
m Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 ▫ Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 392 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
N
T The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold There are two maintenance schedules that show the
E type must be done at the times or mileages specified to required service for your vehicle.
N assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
A First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated
N control system. These, and all other maintenance services
under the conditions that are listed below and at the
C included in this manual, should be done to provide best
E beginning of the schedule.
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
S tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating • Day or night temperatures are below 32 °F (0 °C).
C conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving. • Stop and go driving.
E
D • Extensive engine idling.
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
U
L malfunction is suspected. • Driving in dusty conditions.
E
S NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis- • Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
8 performed by any automotive repair establishment or
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90 °F (32 °C).
individual using any automotive part, which has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of Califor- • Trailer towing.
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 393 M
A
• Off-road or desert operation. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in- I
N
tervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months T
• Heavy Loading
whichever comes first. E
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your N
A
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months, CAUTION! N
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the C
9Maintenance Schedules9 section of this manual. Failure to perform the required maintenance items E
may result in damage to the vehicle. S
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
C
coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000 km) or 60 months, H
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the At Each Stop for Fuel E
9Maintenance Schedules9 section of this manual. D
• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully U
Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not L
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while E
operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched- the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu- S
ule 9B9. racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the 8
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi- level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the • Check the windshield washer solvent and add, if
interval that occurs first. required.
M 394 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Once a Month • Inspect the CV joints (if equipped) and front suspen-
N
T sion components.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
E
N damage. • Check the manual transmission fluid level (if
A equipped).
N • Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
C as required. • Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
E
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake/
S CAUTION!
clutch master cylinder, and manual transaxle and add
C
H as needed. Do not check the automatic transaxle fluid. It must be
E
D • Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct check by a trained service technician every 15,000
U operation. miles and if required only the recommended fluid be
L added. Refer to the section “Fluids, Lubricants And
E At Each Oil Change
S Genuine Parts” for the proper fluid.
• Change the engine oil filter.
8
• Inspect the exhaust system.
• Inspect the brake hoses.
SCHEDULE “B” 395 M
A
Schedule “B” I
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
N
Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle T
• Off-road or desert operation.
under one or more of the following conditions. E
• Heavy Loading N
• Day or night temperatures are below 32 °F (0 °C). A
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your N
• Stop and go driving. C
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months, E
• Extensive engine idling. whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
9Maintenance Schedules9 section of this manual. S
• Driving in dusty conditions. C
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your H
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km). E
coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000 km) or 60 months, D
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the U
speeds during hot weather, above 90 °F (32 °C). 9Maintenance Schedules9 section of this manual. L
E
• Trailer towing. S
8
M 396 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles 3,000 6,000 9,000 12,000 15,000
T (Kilometers) (5 000) (10 000) (15 000) (20 000) (25 000)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 X X X X X
A months whichever comes first.
N
C Rotate tires. X X
E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
X X
stowage.
S
C Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
X
H sary.
E Replace climate control air filtration filter (if X
D
U equipped).
L
E
S
8
A
I
Miles 18,000 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 N
(Kilometers) (30 000) (35 000) (40 000) (45 000) (50 000) T
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 X X X X X N
months whichever comes first. A
N
Rotate tires. X X X C
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct E
X X X
stowage.
S
Inspect brake linings. X C
Replace air cleaner filter. X H
E
Replace spark plugs. X D
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X U
L
Replace climate control air filtration filter (if X E
equipped). S
8
A
I
N Miles 33,000 36,000 39, 000 42,000 45,000
T (Kilometers) (55 000) (60 000) (65 000) (70 000) (75 000)
E
N
C Rotate tires. X X
X X
stowage.
S
C Inspect brake linings. X
H Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces- X
E sary.
D
U Replace climate control air filtration filter (if X
L equipped).
E
S
8
A
I
Miles 48,000 51,000 54,000 57,000 60,000 N
(Kilometers) (80 000) (85 000) (90 000) (95 000) (100 000) T
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 X X X X X E
N
Change Automatic Transaxle (CVT) Fluid and Filter X N
Change Manual Transaxle Fluid. X C
Change Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) fluid. X E
Change Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid. X S
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct H
X X X E
stowage.
D
Inspect brake linings. X U
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X L
Replace spark plugs. X E
S
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, or
X
8
102,000 miles (170 000 km) whichever comes first.
Replace climate control air filtration filter (if X
X
equipped).
A
I
N Miles 63,000 66,000 69,000 72,000 75,000
T (Kilometers) (105 000) (110 000) (115 000) (120 000) (125 000)
E
N
C Rotate tires. X X
X X
stowage.
S
C Inspect brake linings. X
H Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces- X
E sary.
D
U Replace climate control air filtration filter (if X
L equipped).
E
S
8
A
I
Miles 78,000 81,000 84,000 87,000 90,000 N
(Kilometers) (130 000) (135 000) (140 000) (145 000) (150 000) T
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 X X X X X N
N
X X X
stowage.
S
Inspect brake linings. X C
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X H
E
Replace spark plugs. X D
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X U
L
Replace climate control air filtration filter (if X E
equipped). S
8
A
I
N Miles 93,000 96,000 99,000 102,000
T (Kilometers) (155 000) (160 000) (165 000) (170 000)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 months X X X X
A whichever comes first.
N
C Change Manual Transaxle Fluid. X
E Rotate tires. X X
S
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage. X X
C Flush and replace engine coolant, if not done at 60
H X
months.
E
D Replace climate control air filtration filter (if equipped). X
U
L
E
S
8
A
I
Miles 105,000 108,000 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000 N
(Kilometers) (175 000) (180 000) (185 000) (190 000) (195 000) (200 000) T
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 X X X X X X N
N
Change Automatic Transaxle (CVT) Fluid and X C
Filter E
Change Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) fluid. X
S
Change Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid. X C
Rotate tires. X X X H
E
Check spare tire for proper pressure and cor- D
X X X
rect stowage. U
Inspect brake linings. X L
E
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X S
Replace spark plugs. X 8
Replace the Accessory Drive Belt. X
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not re- X
placed at 102,000 miles (170 000 km).
A
I
N Miles 105,000 108,000 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000
T (Kilometers) (175 000) (180 000) (185 000) (190 000) (195 000) (200 000)
E
N Replace climate control air filtration filter (if X
X
A equipped).
N
C ** This maintenance is recommended by the manufac-
E turer to the owner, but not required to maintain the
S emissions warranty.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
SCHEDULE “A” 405 M
A
Schedule “A” I
N
Miles 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 T
E
(Kilometers) (10 000) (20 000) (30 000) (40 000 ) (50 000) N
[Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30] A
N
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X C
Rotate tires. X X X X X E
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct S
X X X X X
stowage. C
Inspect brake linings. X H
E
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces- D
sary. U
L
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X E
Replace spark plugs. X S
Replace climate control air filtration filter (if X X 8
equipped).
M 406 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles 36,000 42,000 48,000 54000 60,000 66,000
T (Kilometers) (60 000) (70 000) (80 000) (90 000) (100 000) (110 000)
E [Months] [36] [42] [48] [54] [60] [66]
N
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X
N Change Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) fluid. X
C Change Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid. X
E Rotate tires. X X X X X X
S Check spare tire for proper pressure and cor-
X X X X X X
C rect stowage.
H Flush and replace engine coolant at 60
E months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles (170 X
D
U 000 km).
L Inspect brake linings. X X
E Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if X
S necessary.
8 Replace engine air cleaner filter. X
Replace spark plugs. X
Replace climate control air filtration filter (if X X
X
equipped).
A
I
Miles 72,000 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 N
(Kilometers) (120 000) (130 000) (140 000) (150 000) (160 000) T
E
[Months] [72] [78] [84] [90] [96] N
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X A
N
Rotate tires. X X X X X C
X X X X X
stowage. S
Inspect brake linings. X X C
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces- X X H
E
sary. D
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X U
L
Replace spark plugs. X E
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X S
Replace climate control air filtration filter (if X X X 8
equipped).
M 408 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles 102,000 108,000 114,000 120,000
T (Kilometers) (170 000) (180 000) (190 000) (200 000)
E [Months] [102] [108] [114] [120]
N
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X
N Change Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) fluid. X
C Change Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid. X
E Rotate tires. X X X X
S Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage. X X X X
C Flush and replace engine coolant, if not done at 60
H X
months.
E Flush and replace engine coolant, if not done at 102,000
D X
U miles (170 000 km)
L Inspect brake linings. X
E Replace the Accessory Drive Belt. X
S
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. X
8 Replace engine air cleaner filter. X
Replace spark plugs. X
Replace climate control air filtration filter (if equipped). X X
A
** This maintenance is recommended by the manufac- I
WARNING! N
turer to the owner, but not required to maintain the T
emissions warranty. E
You can be badly injured working on or around a N
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which A
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re- you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If N
C
ceipts. you have any doubt about your ability to perform a E
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic. S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
m Suggestions For Obtaining Service For m Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
m Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
m Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
m If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 ▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
m Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . . 415 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
m Mopart Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 ▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 9
412 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests

YOUR VEHICLE If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
Prepare For The Appointment
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
At many dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
work to be performed may not be covered by the
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
pointment.
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem. The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
Prepare A List your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident, Warranty service must be done by an authorized
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
service advisor know. that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 413
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to • Vehicle identification number
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
manner.
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
P.O. Box 21–8004
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
this process.
Phone: (800) 992-1997
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
P.O. Box 1621
want to know if you need assistance.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you Phone —(800) 465–2001
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
In Mexico contact:
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Center should include the following information: Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office) Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
9
• Dealership name
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na-
Impaired (TDD/TTY) tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
er’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
Service Contract your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
You may have purchased a service contract for your those documents.
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
pected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
concerns.
date. If you have any questions about your service
MOPART PARTS
WARNING!
Mopart fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals vehicle operating at its best.
known to the State of California to cause cancer and REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause
ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only) investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
this vehicle. individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer. 9
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– To order the following manuals, you may use either the
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Wash- tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
ington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
about motor vehicle safety from http:// for an order form.
www.safercar.gov.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
http://www.NHTSA.gov. manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
In Canada: • Service Manuals.
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
information that students and professional technicians
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
defect to the Canadian government should write to
maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
3V9.
in straightforward language with illustrations, dia-
grams, and charts.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals. Call Toll Free at:

Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations, • 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show Or
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list • www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
of all tools and equipment.
• www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
• Owner’s Manuals.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance TIRE QUALITY GRADES
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you The following describes the tire grading categories estab-
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro- tration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
safety tips. of the tires on your car. 9
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Traction Grades
Requirements in Addition to These Grades. The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
Treadwear
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con-
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
ditions on a specified government test course. For ex-
mance.
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
WARNING!
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
characteristics and climate. peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
WARNING!
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive load-
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and heat buildup and possible tire failure.
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
9
INDEX
10
422 INDEX
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 362 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,159 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361,388
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 353 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,273
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 30
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356,357 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,21
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223,356 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . 12,237,240,326,368
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,241
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,56 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,58,70,170 Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,55
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,173 Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
INDEX 423
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 29 Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . 388
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Caps, Filler
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342,349
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272,366 Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,137,273 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Cargo Compartment
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272,366 Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 69 Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380,381 Caution, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191,199 10
424 INDEX
CD (Compact Disc) Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . 222 Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,223 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . 344 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Child Restraint with Automatic Belts . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360,363
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Cleaning Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,364
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,193,201,213 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
INDEX 425
Crankcase Emission Control System ... . . . . . . . 353 Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . 174 Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . 151 Driving
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . 412 Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,225 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Disposal Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 127
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 179
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 10
426 INDEX
Emergency, In Case of Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 57
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,69,306,359
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 344,392 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Filters
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350,388
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347,388 Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342,349 Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
INDEX 427
Fluid Level Checks Gauge . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Hoses . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Light . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 388 Octane Rating ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121,177,383 Requirements .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 System Hoses .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Folding Rear Seat (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Tank Capacity ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Fueling . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Fuses . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt) . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303,388 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,308,344
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303,388
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Gauges
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 10
428 INDEX
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140,177

Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Hitches
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16,107,301 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 HomeLinkt (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 130
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,31
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122,170 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 122 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
INDEX 429
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Latches

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326,328 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,118
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,58,70,170
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Keyless Entry System (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . 141,144
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . 170,384 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121,177,383 10
430 INDEX
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Locks

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 177 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119,121,170,384 Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 177,344
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 169 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238,244,369
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
INDEX 431
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370,371 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . 370,371 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369,370,371 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174,176
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347,388
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346,415 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349,388
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,344 10
432 INDEX
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLinkt) . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............ 5 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 149
Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276,357
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 5,416 Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Power Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Pretensioners
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . 131,135,183
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Programming Transmitters (Remote
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 281 Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,131,135
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
INDEX 433
Radio, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 221

Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191,199,223 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213,217 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191,199 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Rear Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,66
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Restraints, Infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Remote Control Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213,217 10
434 INDEX
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Rear Folding (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 42 Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,31
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191,193,201,213
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Shift Speeds, Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . 231
INDEX 435
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound

Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289,290,327 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Specifications Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 49
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 127,174 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 173,325
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Steering Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276,357 Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
10
436 INDEX
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 281 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,285,417 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277,285
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281,282 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
INDEX 437
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121,170,384
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,237,240,368 Understanding Your Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . 167
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,238,244 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Transmission Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt) . . 130 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,309
Transmitter Programming (Remote Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 10
438 INDEX
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 30 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Window Airbag (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,55
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . 169 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,159 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123,358
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 YES Essentialst Fabric Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . 373
2007 PATRIOT
2007
OW N E R ’ S
M A N UA L
81-326-0712 First Edition Printed in U.S.A.

2007 Patriot

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2007 Patriot

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2007 PATRIOT

81-326-0712 First Edition Printed in U.S.A.

INTRODUCTION Roll Over Warning

belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could

▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 m Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal

Ignition Key Positions

Key-In-Ignition Reminder unlocked. During normal operation, the Theft Alarm/

NOTE: Replacement Keys

STEERING WHEEL LOCK — Manual To Release The Steering Wheel Lock:

When leaving the vehicle always remove the key

Manual Door Lock Plunger

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.

Power Door Locks

Power Door Lock Switch Location

3. All doors are closed.

The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled.

NOTE: Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock

Inserting Ignition Key

Child Protection Door Lock Location

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,

Three Button Transmitter

SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

Security System Manual Override LIFTGATE

NOTE: Although the liftgate has no inside release

• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-

Power Window Switch Location

passenger doors for passenger window control. The

Window Lockout Switch OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS

Lock Out Switch

of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will

3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head

Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt

Connecting Mini Latch to Buckle

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal

Side Curtain Airbag Location

NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat

Air Bag System Components

If A Deployment Occurs However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a

Maintaining Your Airbag System

Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another colli- WARNING!

Airbag Warning Light Event Data Recorder (EDR)

Data Parameters that May Be Recorded: • Cruise control status

• Safety experts recommend that children ride

fixed lower attachments must be installed in the out-

In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower

Rear Seat Tether Anchors

• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or